Revit MEP 2011 Tutorial

Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.

Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS I S." AUTODESK, INC. DISCL AIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All ri ghts reserved. InstallShield 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE PANTONE Color Publications f or accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or i nto memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer WorldServer . WindowBlinds: WindowBlinds: DirectSkin OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. ™

™

™

™

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All ri ghts reserved. This software is bas ed in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising i n any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1

Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Understanding the Concepts . . . . . Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks . . . . . .

Chapter 3

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . .7 . . . . . 10 . . . . . 10 . . . . . 18 . . . . . 21

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applyi ng a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4

Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

Chapter 5

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6

. . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 79 . 85 . 92 . 94 101

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 14 8 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7

Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9

Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11

Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . System . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13

Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . .

Chapter 14

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii

Introduction

In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally, you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

1

2

Using the Tutorials

1

This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit ® MEP 2010 tutorials, including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials, and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson.

NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials, you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich, Germany. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit ® Structure 2010 tutorials.

How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical, electrical, and plumbing engineering workflows. You complete the following phases of design: ■

Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format.

■

Add basic MEP elements, such as duct, fixtures, and piping.

■

Add more detailed modelling elements, such as mechanical equipment, electrical panels, and pl umbing fixtures.

3

■

Analyze systems and refine MEP elements.

■

Create schedules, views, and sheets to document the project.

■

Create detail views, annotations, and tags.

The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. You do not design entire systems, but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. For example, when you add ductwork, you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. When you open a training file, you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. For example, to provide a richer and more finished design, elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. These elements enhance the exercises you complete.

Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Locate the training files The Tutorials Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. When you install the training files as instructed, they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■

Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an _i suffix.

■

Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an _m suffix.

NOTE Depending on your installation, your Training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. So, you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. On the Contents tab, the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning; however, the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order o rder.. After completing each exercise, you can choose to save yo ur work. However, it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Each training fil e includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Open a training file 1 Click

4 | Chapter Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials

➤

Open.

NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu, the Open dialog displays, and you can open any supported file type. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option, a list of file types displays. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Imperial o r Metric, depending on the instructions in the tutorial.

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click

➤

Save As.

NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. A tra ining file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location.

■

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.rvt.

■

For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and click Save.

Close a training file 7 Click

➤

Close.

8 If you have made changes, you are prompted to save the changes. You may close the file with or without saving changes.

Accessing Training Files | 5

6

Understanding the Basics

2

In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information mod elling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scop e, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and sc hedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere —in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CA D, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition.

■

Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing i s maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic.

■

The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

7

How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make i t especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software so ftware that works like you do, without requiring requi ring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects, Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the design. For example, sinks, boilers, ducts, sprinklers, and electrical panels.

■

Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements.

■

View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the design. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific view-specifi c elements.

There are 2 types of model elements: ■

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and ceilings are hosts.

■

Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, sinks, boilers, ducts, sprinklers, and electrical panels.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■

paper. For Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements.

■

Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

8 | Chapter Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning to walls.

Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design —the building information model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy fo r you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be i n a section or elevation view. North - Elevation View

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories, families, and types.

Category: Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a buildi ng design. For example, categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols.

Understanding the Concepts | 9

Family: Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties —their names and meaning —is the same. For example, a lighting fixture could be considered one family, although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different di fferent sizes and materials. There are 3 kinds of families: ■

Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

■

System families include ducts, pipes, and wires. They are not available for l oading or creating as separate files.

■

■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.

■

You can use the predefined p redefined types to generate new types that belong to this family famil y within the project. For example, the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of fittings with different compositions.

■

System families can be transferred between projects.

In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry geome try that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain maintai n one of more relationships to other project geometry. geometry. ■

Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a p roject, each in-place family contains only a single type. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects, and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Unlike system and standard component families, you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types.

Type: Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for di mensions. Instance: Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft ® Windows operating system. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks.

Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed desi gned to simplify your workflow. workfl ow. With With a few clicks, you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. For example, you can set the ribbo n to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. You can also display several project views at one time, or layer the views to see only the one on top. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic p arts of the Revit interface. Then experiment with them, hiding, showing, and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work.


Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file, and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order, or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. To move panels: ■

Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon.

■

Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To return the panel to the ribbon, click the Return Panels to Ribbon button, or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.

To minimize the ribbon 1 Click

(Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs.

2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■

Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon.

■

Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.

■

Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels.

Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides, you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools.

Parts of the Revit Interface | 11

Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides

The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab

Includes commands for...

Home

many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.

Create (family files only)

many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements.

Insert

tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images, and CAD files.

Annotate

tools used for adding 2D information to a design.

Modify

tools used for editing existing elements, data and systems. When working on the Modify tab, select the tool first, then select what you want to modify.

Analyze

tools used for running analysis on the current design.

Architect

architect-specific tools.

Collaborate

tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.

View

tools used for managing and modifying the current view, and for switching views.

Manage

project and system parameters, and settings.

Add-Ins

third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.


Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. By default, an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. To keep a panel expanded, click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.

A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog.

Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element, a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. For example, when adding duct, a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■

Selection: contains the Modify command.

■

Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector.

■

Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct.

This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command.

Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool

Description

application button

opens the application menu (single -click). closes the application menu (double-click).

application menu

provides access to common tools.

Quick Access toolbar

displays frequently used tools.

InfoCenter

provides requested information.

Status Bar

displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation.


The Application Menu

The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands, such as Export and Publish. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. Click

to access the application menu and perform the following actions:

On the application menu, click...

(New)

to... select a template and create a new drawing. select a file to open.

(Open) save the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Save As) export the current drawing. (Export)


On the application menu, click...

to... publish the current project.

(Publish) print the current drawing. (Print) access product and license information. (Licensing) close the file. (Close)

Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item

Description

(Open)

opens a project, family, family, annotation, or template file.

(Save)

saves a current project, family, annotation, annotation, or template file.

(Undo)

(Redo)

cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions per formed during the session.

(Modify)

enters selection mode and ends the current operation.

(Synchronize and Modify Settings)

synchronizes a local file with that on the central server.

(3D View)

provides views including Default 3D, Camera, and Walkthrough.

(Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Toolbar)

customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. To enable or disable a tool item, click next to it on t he Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down, but is not enabled by default.


To undo or redo a series of operations, click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. This displays the command history in a list. Starting with the most recent command, you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Click Show Belo w the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting.

While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures), or the Family Editor, items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create, Modify, Group, Clipboard, or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. However, when you switch to another editing mode, these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. toolbar. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar.

Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. When you are using a command, the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. When you are highlighting an element or component, the Status Bar displays the name of the famil y and type. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■

Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first.

■

Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable, workshared components.

■

Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components.

■

Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option.

■

Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view.

To hide the Status Bar, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Clear the Status Bar check mark. To show the Status Bar again, repeat the command.

Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next, check the Status Bar. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. In addition, a tool tip appears next to the cursor, displaying the same information.


To cancel or exit the current command, do either of the following: ■

Press ESC twice. ESC twice.

■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Modify).

Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element.

Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool, for example, Place a Wall. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. When you place an el ement in a drawing, use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add.

To change existing elements to a different type, select one or more el ements of the same category. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type.

View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area, including the following:


■

Scale

■

Detail Level

■

Model Graphics Style

■

Shadows On/Off

■

Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view.

■

Crop View On/Off

■

Show/Hide Crop Region

■

Temporary Temporary Hide/Isolate Hi de/Isolate

■

Reveal Hidden Elements

Modifying the View In this exercise, you learn how to modify the vi ews within your Revit MEP project. After you are famil iar with these tasks, it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Zoom the view In the tutorials, you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For example, you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Understanding Understanding how to adjust the view vi ew will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. In the following steps, you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 1 Click

➤

Open.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.rvt. The 3D isometric view displays:

3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.


NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the drawing area, the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 6 Click in the drawing area, and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify; this is referred to as a crossing selection.

When you release the mouse button, the view zooms in on the selected area. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button, you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. If you do not have a wheel mouse, use a zoom menu command to zoom out. NOTE As you zoom in and out, Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments, click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 9 To display SteeringWheels, on the Navigation bar, click

.

NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed dis played click View tab drop-down and select Navigation bar. bar.

➤ Windows

panel ➤ User Interface

Modifying the View | 19

The Full Navigation wheel displays i n the drawing area.

As you move the mouse, the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.

12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. You can change the pivot point poi nt by releasing the mouse button, moving the wheel to the desired location, and then using the Zoom tool again. For more information about SteeringWheels, press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. To define settings for SteeringWheels, click the SteeringWheels tab.

➤

Options, and click tin the Options dialog, click

14 To exit the wheel, press ESC . Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. Click and drag to orbit the design.

16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.


17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view.

Performing Common Tasks In this exercise, you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included i n the tutorials. After you are familiar with these tasks, it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and open Level 2 - HVAC Plan - Design. When drawing or modifying an MEP design, it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Small blue dots, called drag controls, di splay at the ends of selected objects in a p lan view. Similar controls, referred to as shape handles, display along the ends, bottoms, and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. 2 Enter ZR, ZR, zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan, and select the duct, as shown. Notice the small blue dots that displ ay at both ends of the duct. These are the drag controls. 3 Click and drag the bottom control, moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.

Performing Common Tasks | 21

4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct.

Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar, click the drop-down menu next to

(Undo).

All changes you make to a project are tracked. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. co mmands. In this example, you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 6 On the Undo menu, select the first item in the list, Move. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action, on the Standard toolbar, click the Undo command, or press CTRL+Z . Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.


Some commands, such as Move and Copy, require 2 clicks to complete the command. After selecting the element to move, for example, click to specify the starting position, and click again to specify the ending position. In this case, you want to move the duct. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct.

10 Move the cursor to the right, as shown.

The duct is moved to the new position.

Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 11 With the duct already selected, and drag it to the left as shown.


End a command Some commands, such as the Modify Ducts command, stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 To end a command, you can also: ■

Choose another command.

■

Press ESC twice. ESC twice.

Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of o f objects in a view to display di splay objects in specific ways. For example, you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 14 Enter VG. VG. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override di alog, under Visibility: ■

Clear Mechanical - Return.

■

Select Mechanical - Supply.

■

Click OK.

Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.

16 On the Quick Access toolbar, click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.


(Undo) to redisplay the

17 Close the file without saving your changes.


26

3

Getting Started with MEP Projects

In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template, link fil es, use copy/monitor, create and manage views, and modify system settings. You also learn how to use collaboration tools, such as coordination review and interference checking.

Creating an MEP Project In this exercise, you learn how to start a project from a template. You You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipli ne settings. Finally, you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions, such as the default project units and settings; the default building levels and standard views; system families, such as ducts and pipes; and loadable families. You can either select a template from the template library, or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. New projects i nherit all the families, settings, and geometry from the starting template. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click

➤

New ➤ Project.

2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click cl ick Training files, and open Metric

➤

Templates.

You can choose from several templates. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. In that case, you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default.rte template, and click Open. 5 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 6 Click OK. 7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all)

➤

Elevations (Building Elevation), and open North.

27

8 In the drawing area, zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Using the same method, create another new project using the Construction template. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click

➤

New ➤ Project.

13 In the New Project dialog: ■

Under Template file, click Browse.

■

In the Choose Template dialog, navigate to Metric Templates, and select the Systems-Default_Metric.rte template and click Open. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. If you want to use a template other than the default, you can select it now.

■

Under Create new, select Project template.

■

Click OK.

Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. To maintain office standards and reduce rework, you can establish settings that are common to most projects. For example, you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. When you select the material, you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 14 Click Manage tab

➤

Project Settings panel

➤

Project Information.

15 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Energy Analysis, for Energy Data, click Edit. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■

For Building Type, select School S chool or University.

■

For Location, click

■

In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■

■

(Browse).

On the Place tab, for City, select Manchester, NH.

For Building Construction, click

(Browse).

■

In the Building Construction dialog, review the construction materials listed.

■

Click Cancel.

■

For Ground Plane, select Level 1.

■

Click OK twice.

17 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

Project Parameters.

18 In the Project Parameters dialog, select Sub-Discipline and click Modify.

28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP MEP Projects

19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■

For Group parameter under, select Identity Data.

■

For Categories, select Views.

■

Click OK twice.

Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical discipl ines. After standard settings have been established for an organization, they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical, piping, plumbing, and fire protection systems. 20 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.

Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog, under Duct Settings, click Rectangular. 22 In the right pane, for 90.00 mm, 110.00 mm, and 140.00 mm, clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 23 In the left pane, under Duct Settings, click Round. 24 In the right pane, for 90.00 mm, 110.00 mm, 140.00 mm, 260.00 mm, 290.00 mm, and 310.00 mm, clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. c olumns. 25 In the left pane, under Pipe Settings, click Sizes. 26 In the right pane, for 20.000 mm, clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 27 Click OK. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage, power distribution systems, wiring, and demand factors for electrical systems. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 28 Click Insert tab

➤

Load from Library panel

➤

Load Family.

29 In the Load Family dialog: ■

Browse to the Metric Library

■

Holding CTRL, CTRL, select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark.rfa and click Open.

30 Click Manage tab

➤

➤

Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.


➤

MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.

31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog, click Wiring. 32 In the right pane: ■

For Hot Wire Tick Mark, ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected.

■

For Ground Wire Tick Mark, ensure that M_Lo ng Wire Tick Mark is selected.

■

For Neutral Wire Tick Mark, ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.

33 Click OK.

Creating an MEP Project | 29

Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views, families, sheets, and groups that are contained in a project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. In addition, you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog, select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■

For Group by, select Sub-Discipline.

■

For Then by, select Family and Type.

■

For Then by, select Associated Level.

■

For Sort by, select View Name.

■

Select Ascending

■

Click OK twice.

37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Notice that the file is saved as a template. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 38 Close the file.

Linking Projects In this exercise, you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project, synchronize the two models for monitoring changes, and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. To enable this coordination, you link the architectural model with the MEP model. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click

➤

New ➤ Project.

2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and cl ick Open. 4 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 5 Click OK. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab

➤

Link panel ➤ Link Revit.

7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■

In the left pane, click Training.

■

Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m.rvt.

■

From the Positioning list, select Auto - Origin to Origin.

■

Click Open.

30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP MEP Projects Projects

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building buil ding to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floo r Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level li ne for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.


Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a cop ied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and cop ied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the cop ied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level li nes remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level li nes for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. cli ck By Host 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dial og, for the link file, click View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■

Select Show categories from all disciplines.

■

Under Visibility, deselect Levels.

■

Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click E dit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■

For Model Categories, select Custom.

■

Select Show categories from all disciplines.

■

Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Pl anting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Topography.

■

Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.


9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click

➤

Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click

➤

New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click

➤

Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Sel ection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options: ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour.

■

For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of i mportant Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click

➤

Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab.


3 Under Default template file, click Browse. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template.

➤

New ➤ Project,

4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unli kely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list li st of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click cl ick on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

11 In the Places dialog, click

(Add Value).

12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library, and change the name to My Library. Library . 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library, and click

(Browse).

14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects, templates, or families, and click Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first, and select it as the library path.

The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs. The library icons display in i n the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 15 Under Library Name, click My Library. 16 Click

(Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list, and click OK twice.

17 Click

➤

Open.

18 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the My Library icon.


Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. If you work in a large office, you may want to set up an office library li brary on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 19 Click Cancel. 20 Click

➤

Options.

21 On the File Locations tab, click Places. 22 Select My Library. 23 Click

(Remove Value) to delete the library.

24 Click OK. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location, view the current path. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. This path is determined during installation. If you want to relocate this path, specify the new location here. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths, you can specify the lo cations of other files used to define render appearances, such as bump maps, custom color files, and decal image files. 27 Click OK.

Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise, you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. Modify spelling settings 1 Click

➤

Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Spelling tab. 3 Under Settings, select Ignore words in uppercase. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check, click Edit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 5 In the text editor, enter sheetmtl-Cu. sheetmtl-Cu. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary, click Edit. 9 In the text editor, scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 11 In the Options dialog, click OK. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 13 Click Annotate tab

➤

Text panel

➤

Text.

14 Click in the drawing area, and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 15 Click Annotate tab

➤

Selection panel ➤ Modify.

16 Click Annotate tab

➤

Text panel

➤

Spelling.

Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. dictionary. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase.

Specifying Spelling Options | 39

17 In the Spelling dialog, click Close. 18 Click

➤

Options.

19 In the Options dialog, click the Spelling tab. 20 Under Settings, click Restore Defaults. This command resets the spelling settings to their original co nfiguration. 21 Under Personal dictionary, click Edit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 22 In the text editor, delete sheetmtl-CU. sheetmtl-CU. 23 In the text editor, click File menu

➤

Save, and then click File menu ➤ Exit.

24 In the Options dialog, click OK. 25 Close the file without saving it.

Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise, you modify snap settings. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. You can turn snap settings on and off, or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. In this exercise, you modify snap increments, work with snapping turned off, and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Modify snap increments 1 Click

➤

New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project.

2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. As you zoom in and out within a view, Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents represe nts less than 2mm in the drawing area. You You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.

6 In the Snaps dialog, under Dimension Snaps, c lick in the Length dimension snap increments ;. box following the value 1000 ; and enter 500 ;.


7 Under Object Snaps, notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. For example, if you SM, and only midpoint snaps are recognized want to snap an object to a wall midpoint, enter SM, until you commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint, snapping reverts to the system default settings. 8 In the Snaps dialog, click OK. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 10 On the Options Bar, deselect Chain. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area, and move the c ursor to the right.

Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If it does not, zoom out until it does so. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. TIP To zoom while sketching, use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have a wheel button, you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. While sketching, you can also use the zoom shortcut keys, such as ZO to zoom out. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall, zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. This is the increment i ncrement that you added previously. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall, enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.

Modifying Snap Settings | 41

Notice that when snapping is turned off completely, the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall, and move the cursor to the right. Do not set the wall end point.

Notice that snapping is once again active. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping, the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall . If you move the cursor along the wall, it will snap to the endpoints, the midpoint, and the wall edges. 19 Enter SM. SM. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to mi dpoints. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.

21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 22 Move the cursor downward, and specify the wall endpoint. 23 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

24 Under Dimension Snaps, click in the Length dimension snap increments box, and delete the ;. value 500 ;. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 25 Click OK. 26 Close the file, with or without saving it.


Creating a Mechanical System

In this tutorial, you l earn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

43

44

Planning Mechanical Systems

4

In this tutorial, you design a mechanical system for an office building. This system consists of a cooling tower, water source heat pump (WSHP), duct system and a hydronic pip ing system. As you create the mechanical system, you follo w a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. By following the recommended workflow, you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. At the end of the tutorial, you will understand the process, methodology, and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. If the tutorial training files are not present, go to http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP, you first plan the system. In this lesson, you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. After applying a color scheme to the zones, you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building.

Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. They contain i nformation about the locations in which they are placed. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In this exercise, you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system d esign, you first configure the linked architectural model, and then you create a plenum level.

45

Training File ■

Click

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m.rvt.

➤

Open ➤ Project.

Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In this section, you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipl ine) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Space Plan is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model, and after the linked model highlights, click to select it. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding, and click OK. This makes the architectural components (such as walls, ceilings, and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. NOTE When working with a linked file, make certain that architectural elements (such as walls, roof, and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. These componen ts are defined in the architectural training file, not in the MEP training file. 5 Press Esc to Esc to clear the selection. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Next, you add a level for plenums. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysi s. 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP - Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click West - MEP. MEP.

46 | Chapter Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems

7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel, and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 On the Draw panel, click

(Line).

10 On the Options Bar: ■

Verify that Make Plan View is selected.

■

Click Plan View Types, and in the Plan View Types dialog, verify that only Fl oor Plan is selected, and click OK. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added.

■

2600mm. For Offset, enter 2600mm.

11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■

Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level.

■

Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line.

12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. The new level is placed, offset of fset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above l evel 2. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4), and enter Level 2 Plenum. Plenum. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views, click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 16 Press Esc .

A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template), and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. A new plenum floor plan view vi ew named Level 2 Plenum is created, and i s listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipli ne) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans, right-click Level 2 Plenum, and click Properties.

Preparing Spaces | 47

18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■

Under Graphics, for View Scale, verify that 1 : 100 is selected.

■

For Sub-Discipline, select MEP - Plenum.

■

For View Classification, select Design.

■

Under Identity Data, for Default View Template, select Plenum Plan.

■

Under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.

■

In the View Range dialog:

■

■

Under Primary Range, for Top, select Level Above (Level 3), and for Offset, enter 0.

■

300mm. For Cut plane, enter an Offset of 300mm.

■

Under View Depth, for Level, verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0.

Click OK twice.

The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP - Plenum Browser.

➤

Floor Plans in the Project

Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. Notice that the site plan pl an displays in the view. You You apply the default view template so that only o nly the architectural floor plan displays. 20 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2 Plenum, and click Appl y Default View Template. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the tra ining file that Autodesk provides. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this exercise, you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. In the next exercise, you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area, and then place spaces in various types of areas.

Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. They contain i nformation about the locations in which they are placed. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In this exercise, you place spaces in areas of the building model.


Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Place a space 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipl ine) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Space Plan is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automaticall y tool. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 On the Options Bar: ■

Verify that Tag Tag on placement is selected.

■

For Upper Limit, select Level 2 Plenum. This specifies the vertical extent of the space.

■

For Offset, enter 0.

■

For

■

Verify that Leader is cleared.

■

For Space, select New.

(Tag Location), select Horizontal.

6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor, walls, and ceilings).

Placing Spaces | 49

7 Click to place the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 9 Select the space, and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■

219.. Under Identity Data, for Number, enter 219

■

Library. For Name, enter Library. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file, ensuring coordination between the files.

■

Click OK.

11 Press Esc to Esc to clear the selection. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP - Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 14 In the drawing area, double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26).


15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-do wn. 19 On the Options Bar: ■

Verify that Tag Tag on placement is selected.

■

For Upper Limit, select Level 3.

■


20 Click in the Library to place the space, and then click Modify. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time, demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.

21 Using the method learned previously, change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P.

Placing Spaces | 51

22 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Energy Analysis, select s elect Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 23 Click OK. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.

25 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise, you place a space i n a large corridor area, and then split the space using a space separation line. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.


Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Spaces indicating that it ’s the active view. vi ew.

➤

Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Space Plan is highlighted,

2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 On the Options Bar, for Upper Limit, select Level 3, and for Offset, enter 0. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space, and then press Esc .

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53

7 In the Project Browser, open Schedules/Quantities placed space, which was numbered 219Q.

➤

Space Schedule, and scroll to the newly

In the schedule, notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 In the schedule, click in the name column, and select Corridor. Corridor. 10 Click in the number column, and change the space number to 216A.


Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 11 Close the schedule view, and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. Separator. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line, click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221, as shown.

14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.

15 Press Esc twice. Esc twice. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55

16 Using the method learned previously, place a space in the lower area of the split space, with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.


Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise, you place a space i n a chase, and change the upper limit to acco unt for the entire volume of the chase.


Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipl ine) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Space Plan is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel

➤

Section, and place a section in the view as shown:

■

Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.

■

Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.

■

If necessary, click

■

Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.

(Flip Section) to reorient the section.

Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57

4 Press Esc . 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 6 Enter VG. VG. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, expand Spaces, select Interior and Reference, and then click OK. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 10 In the plan view, add a space: ■

Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

■

On the Options Bar, for Upper Limit, select Level 3.

■


■

In the plan view, click in the chase area to place the space.

11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view, but that the space does not fill the entire chase.

12 Click in the section view, select the space, right-click, and click Element Properties. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■

Under Constraints, for Upper Limit, select Roof Level.


■

1200.. For Limit Offset, enter 1200 You enter a value that is above the level of the roof.

■

Chase. Under Identity Data, for Name, enter Chase.

■

225PC. For Number, enter 225PC.

14 Click OK. Bounding elements (such as walls, floors, c eilings, and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element, the space displays the volume up to the roof only.

15 Press Esc . Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 - Space Plan, and maximize the view. 17 Type ZF. ZF. 18 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel

➤

Tag All.

19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, under Loaded Tags, select Space Tag-No Name : Sp ace Tag With Volume, and click OK. All spaces in the view are tagged.

Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59

20 Close the file with or without saving it. You have created a p lenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. You You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area, and you placed spaces for various types of areas. In the next exercises, you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.

Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building, buil ding, Revit MEP immediately immedi ately adds them to the Default zone. In this exercise, you view and verify zones in the System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Training File ■

Click

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m.rvt.

➤

Open ➤ Project.

NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. To display space reference lines, on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, under Spaces, click Reference. 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Zoning is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel

➤

System Browser.

3 Right-click in the System Browser, click View ➤ Zones, and verify that All Disciplines is selected. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. The browser is a hierarchical hi erarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. After a space is placed in an area, it is automatically added to the Default zone. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create, which removes the space from the Default zone.


The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable (

) or

). You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space.

5 In the System Browser, double-click 121 Cafeteria. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Energy Analysis, select Occupiable, and click OK. The graphic in the System Browser updates, indicating that the space is oc cupiable. Next, you assign spaces to a zone. As you do this, you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise, you assign spaces to zones i n the building, and verify the zones in the System Browser. Browser. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. To display space reference lines, on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, under Spaces, click Reference. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Zoning is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. The Zone tool is active, the Edit Edi t Zone tab displays, and a new zone is created. The new zone is listed in the System Browser.

Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61

NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Using the Edit Zone tab, you can add or remove a space from the zone, and modify the zone properties. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 4 In the drawing area, select Computer Lab 222, Instruction 221, and El ectrical 220 spaces, and click Finish Editing Zone.

In the System Browser, expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab, Instruction, and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). To view the zone in the drawing area, you need to activate the zone visibility. 5 With the drawing area active, type VG. VG. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■

Under Visibility, select HVAC Zones.

■

Expand HVAC HVAC Zones, and then select only Interior Fi ll and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill).

■

Click OK.

The new zone displays with color fil l and a zone reference line. The zone reference line indic ates that the 3 spaces are in the zone.


TIP After you finish editing the zone, you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone, and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab

➤

Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.

8 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Name, enter 2 - West - Area B, B, and click OK. The new zone name displays di splays in the System Browser. 9 In the System Browser, expand 2 - West - Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 10 On the Edit Zone tab, click Finish Editing Zone. 11 Close the System Browser. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise, you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the buil ding. You You activated zone visibility in the views, and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.

Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise, you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building, and verify the zone in the System Browser. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. To display space reference lines, on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, under Spaces, click Reference. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Zoning is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 - Zoning. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.

5 Click in the Level 1 - Zoning view to activate it.

Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63

6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 8 In the Level 1 - Zoning floor fl oor plan, select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active, clic k in the Level 2 - Zoning Zoni ng view, and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.

Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 - Zoning view. 12 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel

➤

Tag by Category.


Verify that Leader is selected.

■

Select Attached End.

■

Verify that the distance is 12mm.

14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 15 Press Esc , zoom out, and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.


The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed, the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 - Zoning view, double-click the zone tag. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog, for Name Value, enter Lounge - East, East, and click OK. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. The new zone name displays di splays in the System Browser. You You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise, you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building.

Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise, you verify the building, space, and zone information, and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. Training File ■

Click

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m.rvt.

➤

Open ➤ Project.

Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser, under Design make it the active view.

➤

Zoning ➤ Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 - Zoning to

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel

➤

Heating and Cooling Loads.

View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, on the ViewCube, click the corner where the Top, Top, Front, and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.

4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane), verify that Wireframe is selected. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. 5 On the Details tab: ■

Expand 1_South_Area C, and select 109 Lounge.

Working with the Analytical Model | 65

The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■

Click (Highlight). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Using the Highlight tool, you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building.

TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Right-click in the preview pane to a ccess pan and zoom commands.

■

Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Next, you isolate the space.

■

With 109 Lounge selected, click (Isolate). The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.

■

On the Details tab, select 1_South_Area C. All spaces in the zone display in isolation.


6 Click

to deactivate the Isolate tool.

Next, you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab, select 109 Lounge. Below the list of spaces and zones, the space information displays for the selected space. 8 Verify the space information: ■

For Space Type, click , and in the Space Type Settings dialog, scroll down in the left pane, select Lounge/Recreation, and click OK. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary.

■

For Construction Type, verify that is selected. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space.

■

For People, click , and in the People dialog, verify that is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person), and then cli ck OK. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space.

■

For Electrical Loads, click , and in the Electrical Loads dialog, verify that is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values, and then click OK. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.

Next, you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. Below the list of spaces and zones, the zone information displays for the selected zone. 10 Verify the zone information: ■

For Service Type, verify that is selected.

■

For Heating Information, verify that 21.11 °C : 32.22 °C : N/A is specified. This indicates the heating set point, heating air temperature, and humidification set point.

■

For Cooling Information, verify that 23.33 °C : 12.22 °C : N/A is specified. This indicates the cooling set point, poi nt, cooling air temperature, and dehumidification set point. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point, you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters.

■

For Outdoor Air Information, verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specifi ed. This indicates the outdoor air per person, outdoor air per area, and air changes per hour.

Next, you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. View the shaded model

11 On the View Selector, click

(Shading).

Working with the Analytical Model | 67

NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls, floors, roofs, and other room-bounding components.

12 Using the methods learned previously, highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume.

13 Deactivate the Isolate tool, and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.

Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, click Cancel. 15 In the Project Browser, open MEP - Plenum

➤

Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.

16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■

For Upper Limit, select Level 3.

■


18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space, and then click Place Space tab panel ➤ Modify.


➤

Selection

Modify space properties 19 Select the space, and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■

212P. Under Identity Data, for Number, enter 212P.

■

For Name, select Plenum.

■

Under Energy Analysis, notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Because this is an unoccupied space, it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis.

■

Under Energy Analysis, select Plenum. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned.

■

Click OK.

Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area, select the zone that includes all al l plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum).

22 Click Modify HVAC HVAC Zones tab

➤

Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone.

23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space, and select space Plenum 212P. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, and verify that the space has replaced the void. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise, you verified building, space, and zone information, and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes.

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise, you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling, and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Training File ■

Click

➤

Open ➤ Project.

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69

■


Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser, under Views (Discipline) Level 2 - Space Plan. 2 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

➤

Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans, double-click

Project Information.

3 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Energy Analysis, for Energy Data, click Edit. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■

For Building Type, select School S chool or University.

■

03101. For Postal Code, enter 03101.

■

For Location, click in the Value field, and then click

■

In the Manage Place and Locations dialog:

.

■

On the Place tab, for City, verify that Manchester, NH, is selected.

■

Select Automatically adjust the clock for dayli ght savings changes. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time, this option adjusts the times automatically. automatically.

■

On the Weather tab, verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected, and click OK.

■

In the Type Properties dialog, for Building Service, verify that Water Water Loop Heat Pump is specified.

■

For Building Construction, verify that is specified.

■

For Ground Plane, verify that Level 1 is selected.

■

For Project Phase, verify that New Construction is selected.

■

For Sliver Space Tolerance, verify that 300 is specified.

■

For Export Complexity, verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected.

■

Click OK twice.

Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog, under Volume Computations, verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting), and click OK. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. If, after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool, you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate, you need to select this option. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the buildi ng. 8 In the drawing area, select space Library 219, right-click, and click Element Properties. In order to select a space, first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.



Under Energy Analysis, verify that Occupiable is selected.

■

For Condition Type, select Heated and cooled. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load, a cooling load, both, or neither. neither.

■

For Space Type, click in the Value column, and then click

■

In the Space Type Settings dialog, select Library - Audio Visual, and click OK.

■

For People, click Edit.

■

In the People dialog: ■

Under Occupancy, for Values, select Specified.

■

Select Area per person, and enter 15 sq. m.

■

Under Heat Gain (per Person), for Values, select Specified.

■

W. For Sensible, enter 60 W.

■

W. For Latent, enter 45 W.

■

Click OK.

■

For Electrical Loads, click Edit.

■

In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■

Under Lighting, for Values, select Actual.

■

Under Power, for Values, select Actual.

■

Click OK twice.

10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel

➤

.

Heating and Cooling Loads.

11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dial og, verify the settings specified earlier: ■

For Building Type, verify that School or University is selected.

■

For Location, verify that Manchester, NH, is specified.

■

For Building Service, verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected.

■

For Building Construction, verify that is specified. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog).

(opens the

IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. You have verified the building information. Next, you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. 12 Click the Details tab. If a

(Warning) (Warning) displays for any space in the building, it should be corrected before you

calculate loads. Select the space associated with the warning, and click to learn the cause for the warning. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads Lo ads dialog,

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71

click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. You should correct the space error in the building model, and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. There should be no warnings displayed. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library, select 219 Library. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays, and can be modified here. The Electrical Lo ads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads.

■

Select 2_Middle_Library, and under Heating Information, click Information).

(Zone Heating

■

In the Heating Information dialog, verify that Heating Set Point is 21.11°C, and click OK.

Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, click Calculate. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed, the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes, and a loads report displays. 15 Review the loads report for project, weather, space, and zone information for the building model. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building, space, or zone information, or make any changes to the model, otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 16 After you review the loads report, you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equi pment usage in the building. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 17 In the loads report, under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library, click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library Li brary.. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 - Space Plan. 19 In the drawing area, select 219 Library, and then click Modify Spaces tab panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

➤

Element

20 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Energy Analysis, review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 21 Click OK. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise, you performed a heating and cooling l oads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report.

Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise, you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties.


Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 - Zoning Load Fill is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel

➤

Legend.

3 In the drawing area, click to the right of the build ing to place the legend. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■

For Space Type, select HVAC Zones.

■

For Color Scheme, verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected.

■

Click OK.

5 Zoom in to the legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts, in relatively small increments. You want want a scheme that allows for a greater range.

Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73

Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area, select the color scheme legend. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, dialo g, under Schemes, select Cooling Load - Expanded Ranges, and click OK. The new scheme displays in the view.

The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.


Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser, open Design

➤

Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

11 Using the method learned previously, add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section sectio n view.

12 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise, you applied a col or scheme to the zones in your building. In the next exercise, you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.

Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise, you create a schedule for the supply ai r system project. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document, you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75

Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Design active view.

➤

Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 - Space Fill is the

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel

➤

Schedule/Quantities.

3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■

Under Category, select Spaces. If you select Show categories from all disciplines, more category options are available.

■

Schedule. For Name, enter Space Airflow Schedule.

■

Select Schedule building components.

■

For Phase, select New Construction.

■

Click OK.

Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■

At the bottom left of the dialog, for Select available fields from, select Spaces.

■

Under Available fields, double-click: ■

Level

■

Number

■

Name

■

Calculated Supply Airflow

■

Actual Supply Airflow

The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. ■

Click Calculated Value.

Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■

Delta. For Name, enter Airflow Delta.

■

Select Formula.

■

For Discipline, select HVAC.

■

For Type, select Air Flow.

■

For Formula, click

■

In the Fields dialog, select Calculated Supply Airflow, and click OK.

■

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, enter - (minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow, and then click

(Browse).

.

■

Using the method learned previously, add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula.

■

Click OK. In the Schedule Properties dialog, the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.


Specify additional schedule properties ■

■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■

For Sort by, select Level.

■

Select Ascending, Header, and Blank line.

■

For Then by, select Number.

On the Formatting tab: ■

For Fields, select Level, and then select Hidden field.

■

For Fields, select Airflow Delta, and then click Conditional Format. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculate d and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range.

Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■

In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■

For Test, select Not Between.

■

For Value, enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. L/s.

■

For Background Color, click the color swatch.

■

In the Color dialog, select red, and click OK. Under Conditions to Use, notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s.

■

Click OK twice.

The schedule displays, and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Double-click the column boundary to expand the co lumn to the width of the text, right-click to access schedule properties, or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model, a view opens that contains the selected space.

6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab that Show is highlighted.

➤

Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel, verify

Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77

Because no air terminals have been placed in the model, all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0, and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. In later exercises, you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise, you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range, the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In the next lesson, you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces.


Designing Mechanical Air Systems

5

Designing air systems in Revit MEP is i s a straightforward and intuitive process. In this lesson, you will create supply air systems. You You begin your supply air systems desi gn by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). Then, you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After system creation, you size ductwork and validate your air system design.

IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. After completing the air systems lesson, you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems.

Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise, you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters, learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the cei ling plan, and work with the airflow schedule.

79

Training File ■

Click

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m.rvt.

➤

Open ➤ Project.

Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 - HVAC Ceiling is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view vi ew.. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, Schedul e, and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 3 In the ceiling view, zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active, and scroll to space 223. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule, and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.

Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 - HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.

80 | Chapter Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems Systems

8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Supply Diffuser - Hosted: Workplane-based Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space, as shown. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host, which in this case is the ceiling grid. If the host element is modified or moved, the hosted elements are updated as well.

11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Notice that the lounge ’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Also, the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan, select the diffuser. Fl ow, enter 215 L/s, 13 On the Options Bar, for Flow, L/s, and press Enter . The schedule updates with the new flow data. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 15 On the Options Bar, verify that Constrain is cleared, and then select both Copy and Multiple. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the co py start point. 17 Move the cursor down, type 3600 3600,, and press Enter . 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown, and then press Esc to Esc to end the command.

Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81

Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel

➤

Tag by Category.

21 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 22 In the drawing area, select one of the diffusers. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the di ffuser object, you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog, click Yes. 24 In the Open dialog, dial og, navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag.rfa, and click Open. 25 In the drawing area, select each of the 5 supply diffusers, and then press Esc . Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s, and the airflow delta value is wi thin acceptable range. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser - Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 On the Placement tab, click Place on Face. 29 Place 2 diffusers, as shown. As you place the return diffusers, notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Next, you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.


Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area, select one of the return diffusers, and click Modify Air Terminals tab panel ➤ Edit Family.

➤ Family

31 In the alert dialog, click Yes. 32 In the Project Browser, open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. Level. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines, press Tab to highlight the chain of lines, as shown, and click to select the lines.

34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Reference, select Strong Reference, and cli ck OK.

Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83

You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to al ign to the lines of the ceiling grid. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of o f the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

ali gn the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice. 43 Using the same method, align Esc twice.


44 While pressing Ctrl , select both return diffusers, and o n the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 310 L/s, L/s, and press Enter . Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and clic k Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

47 Using the same method, clear cl ear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.


Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design Plan - Design to make it the active view.

➤

Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC

2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1 : 100. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click clic k View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select M_Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 - 200 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the ai r terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.


The schedule was automatically updated with the actual suppl y airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■

2400.. In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 2400 Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level.

■

L/s. Under Mechanical - Airflow, Ai rflow, for Flow, enter 170 L/s.

■

Click OK.

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 6000 6000,, and then press Enter . 15 Press Esc . By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and fl ow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.


16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right.

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel

➤

Tag by Category.

18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc .


Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, i t, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■

Select Embedded Schedule.

■

For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the d iffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflo w. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select 21. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 210 L/s, L/s, and press Enter . 29 Using the same method, change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).


The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you ’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.


32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.43 W (approximately 1.3 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select M_WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 7-18 kW - Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice Esc twice to end the command.


40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Constraints

➤

Offset, enter , and click OK.

42 Press Esc to Esc to clear the selection. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 44 Zoom in to space 115, and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc . 45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise, you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. A Revit MEP system is the logical l ogical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses, including energy analysis. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. You then create the logical connection between the system components. After creating the logical connection, you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. In this exercise, you also use the System Browser to vali date systems. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections, physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. However, they are necessary to perform ca lculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view. vi ew. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. When you highlight a space, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel

➤

System Browser.

4 If the System Browser title is Zones, right-click the title, and click View

➤

Systems.

5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems l isted. IMPORTANT In the System Browser, all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. hierarchy. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. folder. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed, Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. As you add diffusers to systems, the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 6 Keep the System Browser open, and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area, select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223.


Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout, Connect Into, and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Ai r Terminals Terminals tab. These tools vary depending on the equipment equip ment used to create a system. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel

➤

Supply.

Notice that a mechanical system now displays i n the System Browser. Browser. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab 10 Click Edit Duct System tab

➤

System Tools panel

➤

Edit System.

Edit Duct System panel

➤

Add To System.

➤

Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 11 In the drawing area, select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. On the Options Bar, the number of elements is updated.

12 In the System Browser, expand Mechanical 13 Click Edit Duct System tab

➤

➤

Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1.


➤

System Properties.

14 In the Instance Properties dialog, review the Number of Elements, System Name, and Flow value. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 15 Click Cancel. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel supply diffuser in space 223.

➤

Add To System, and then select the last

17 Using the method learned previously, access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 18 Click OK. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel WSHP (located outside the space).

➤

Select Equipment, and then select the

NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent, the air terminals are the children, and the system connects them.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93

Rename the system Next, you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties, which updates the name in the System Browser. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab

➤


➤

Equipment Properties.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Mark, highlight the value (WSHP Ctrl+C to copy it. 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to 22 Click OK. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab

➤


➤

System Properties.

24 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for System Name, highlight the value and Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. click Ctrl+V to 25 Click OK. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. Browser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise, you created low l ow pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. buildi ng. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise, you create ductwork to physically connect system components. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. In this exercise, you also use the System Browser to validate systems.

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.


Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - HVAC Plan- Design is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view vi ew.. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 If the System Browser isn ’t displayed, click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. 4 In the drawing area, select the upper left diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. A Generate Layout tab displays, which provides various vario us layout tools. Also, the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Li nes indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 5 On the Options Bar, for Solution Sol ution Type, select Network. In this case, the Network type provides several solutions, each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions, and display solution 1.

7 On the Options Bar, click Settings. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■

Select Main.

■

For Duct Type, select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.

■

For Offset, enter 3000 3000..

■

Select Branch.

■

For Duct Type, select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.

■

3000.. For Offset, enter 3000

■

For Flex Duct Type, select Flex Duct Round : Flex - Round.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95

■

900.. For Maximum Flex Duct Length, enter 900

■

Click OK.

9 On the Generate Layout panel, click Modify. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct, and use the drag control to drag it to the left, as shown. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings, you ’ll get an error in a later step.

11 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created, or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the duct. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. For example, a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added, as is the elbow itself.


NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection, thus it is not part of the system. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area, highlight a segment of the main duct, press Tab twice to highlight the entire system, and click to select it. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected, you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Tab. The first time you press Tab Tab, the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts, fittings, and equipment. If the entire network does not highlight, a disconnection exists. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Usually, Usually, you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, for Color Scheme, select Duct Color Fill - Flow, and click OK. Using a flow-based color scheme, you can verify connectivity as you create a system.


Notice that the legend includes all possi ble values for the color scheme, but not all values are used in this view. vi ew. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend, and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 17 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Values Displayed, sel ect By View, and then click OK. The legend now shows only the color scheme val ues used in this view. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area, select the WSHP, WSHP, and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

➤

Element

19 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical - Airflow, note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s), and click OK. 20 In the drawing area, select one of the diffusers in the system, and on the Op tions Bar, for Flow, decrease the flow value by 50 L/s, and press Enter . Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated.


21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP, and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area, select the color scheme legend. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, for Schemes, select Duct Color Fill - Velocity. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air i s flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 26 Click OK, and then press Esc to Esc to clear the selection.

Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area, highlight a segment of the duct, press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP), and then click to select it. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■

Pa/m. Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter .65 Pa/m.

■

Select Only.

■

Under Constraints, for Branch Sizing, select Calculated Size Onl y.

■

Select Restrict Height, and select 400.

■

Click OK.

If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings, you need to modify the layout: ■

In the warning dialog, click Cancel.

■

Select the upper segment of main duct, and drag it to the right.

■

Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.


The ductwork and fittings are updated. The flow information graphically represents the properti es of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system.

Inspect the system The System Inspector is i s a tool that lets you place the cursor curso r over each system to inspect it for fo r airflow, pressure, and pressure loss. Using this tool, you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection), and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Inspector. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 32 Click System Inspector tab

➤

System Inspector panel

➤

Inspect.

33 Move the cursor over the system components. Use the information that displays (flow, static pressure, and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system, so that you can modify the system design accordingly.


NOTE As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.

35 Click Finish. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.

Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise, you modify existing existi ng ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct.

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Manually Creating Ductwork | 101

Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view vi ew.. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner, and select the WSHP. WSHP. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room ’s double doors), and click Draw Duct. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel, and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Press Spacebar to Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and l ocation. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.

7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers, and click to specify the end of the main duct.


8 Press Esc twice Esc twice to end the command. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct, select the top right diffuser, right-click the connector grip, and click Draw Duct. NOTE When drawing duct, use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Mi tered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3000 3000.. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specifi ed offset height. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct.

13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 14 In the Project Browser, double-click MEP - Design

➤

3D Views ➤ Level 1 - 3D MEP.

15 On the ViewCube, click the corner where the Top, Front, and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown.


Click this corner

Resulting view orientation

16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 19 In the drawing area, in space 115, select the top unconnected supply diffuser.

20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel

➤

Connect Into.

21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. The ductwork is automatically created, and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the c onnector into the main duct), it is considered a closed loop.


22 Using the same method, connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Branch ductwork in 2D

Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct, and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. You can ignore the warning. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. 25 Press Esc . Branch ductwork in 3D


Add an endcap 26 In the plan view, zoom in to the open end of the main duct. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations, you need to add an endcap to create a clo sed loop. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.

30 Press Esc twice. Esc twice. Endcap in 3D

Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown, and then click Modify.


Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split), press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run, and click to select it. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Constraints, clear Restrict Height, and click OK. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space, such as a plenum. 37 Press Esc to Esc to clear the selection. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system.

Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area, select a segment of the main duct, and click Modify Ducts tab panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

➤

Element

39 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct, and then click OK. 40 Using the same method, verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.


108

Designing a Mechanical Piping System

6

In this lesson, you create a hydronic p iping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. You begin the piping system design by placi ng water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Then, you create the systems and piping to logicall y and physically connect the system components, including 2 base mounted pumps, additional water source heat pumps from level 1, and a cool ing tower located on the roof. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler, using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode, or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. In this lesson, you learn to: ■

Place mechanical equipment.

■

Create return and supply piping systems.

■

Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.

■

Automatically and manually lay out piping.

■

Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating.

■

Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing.

■

Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections.

Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise, you place mechanical equipment, incl uding 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler, on level 3 of the building model.

109

Training File ■

Click

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m.rvt.

➤

Open.

Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view vi ew.. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_WSHP - Horizontal High Efficiency - 7-18kW - Left Return - Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Press Spacebar to o f the building, Spacebar to rotate the component, and click to place it in the shorter wing of in corridor 328, as shown.

110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Mechanical Piping Piping System

NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view, you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. component . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.


➤

Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.

7 On the Options Bar, verify that Wall faces i s selected. 8 Click the corridor wall face, c lick the top edge of the WSHP, and click to place the dimension, as shown.

9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 Select the WSHP, click the dimension, and enter 600 600..

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111

11 Press Enter and Enter and then press Esc .

12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment, and in the Type Selector, verify that the WSHP is still selected. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed, as shown. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.)

14 Click Modify. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl , select the 2 WSHPs, and click cli ck Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.



2750.. Under Constraints, for Offset, enter 2750

■

L/s. Under Mechanical, for Water Flow, Flow, enter 0.75 L/s.

■

Click OK.

17 Press Esc to Esc to clear the selection. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Press Spacebar 3 Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component, and click to place it in the mechanical room, above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump, as shown.

21 Click Modify.

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113


Creating a Piping System In this exercise, you create the return and supply pi ping systems, and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. This logical connection allo ws Revit MEP to perform various analyses, including flow and pressure. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■

Place mechanical equipment and other system components.

■

Create the logical connection between the system components.

■

Create pipes to physically connect the system compo nents.

IMPORTANT All IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Unlike logical connections (systems), physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. You can create pipes to connect system components, but without a corresponding system, analyses cannot be performed. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower


Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open.

Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view vi ew.. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space - Mech 330). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel

➤

System Browser.

4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window, and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen, where it is easier to review the information. 5 In the System Browser, right-click the Systems column heading, and click View

➤

Piping.

This display option allows you to simplify simpli fy the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. In the System Browser, all system components are organized in a folder tree hi erarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■

Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components.

■

Assigning a system component to an existing system.

After you placed the WSHPs and boiler, Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. As you assign equipment to systems, the assigned equi pment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT All IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. Therefore, leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area, while pressing Ctrl , select the 2 WSHPs. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel

➤

Hydronic Return.

A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. This display indicates that the system is selected. It does not indicate indi cate a pipe layout path.

Creating a Piping System | 115

9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area, and the Edit System tool is not active, select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Water Return. 10 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 12 In the drawing area, select the boiler. Notice that on the Options Bar, the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW.

13 Click Finish Editing System. You have created the hydronic return system. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel

➤

Hydronic Supply.

Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 17 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter CHWS to represent Chilled Chill ed Water Supply.


18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System, and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.

19 In the Project Browser, under Design Plan - Design.

➤

HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, double-click double-cli ck Roof - HVAC

20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. buil ding, and select the cooling tower. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building,

22 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out, and click OK. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 23 Close the roof plan view. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 25 Select the boiler. boi ler. You select the boiler as equipment for suppl y to the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). In heating mode, the boiler supplies heated water to the system, and bypasses the cooling tower. In cooling mode, the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system; the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 26 Click Finish Editing System. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.


Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser, right-click the Hydronic Supply system category, and click Expand All. 28 Using the same method, expand the Hydronic Return system category. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 29 Right-click CHWS, and click Select. The hydronic supply system highlights in red, indicating the logical connection. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. tower.

In the System Browser, you can view several parameters, including the flow rate and size of the component. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading, and click Column Settings. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 31 In the Column Settings dialog, expand Pipi ng, select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature, and click OK. 32 In the System Browser, right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system, and click Properties. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog, 0.8, and click OK. di alog, under Mechanical, for Water Flow, Flow, enter 0.8, The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise, you create the physical connections in the p ipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. You also manually modify the layout path as required.


Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open.

Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view vi ew.. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper l eft corner, drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. Notice that all components within the Level 3 - HVAC HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space - Mech 330). 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 5 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Mechanical Equipment, and click OK. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs), the boiler, and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). When you draw a box to select components, you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering, you can place the cursor over a system component, press Tab Tab to highlight the system, and click to select it. 6 Press Esc to Esc to clear the selection. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel

➤

Generate Layout.

A system preview displays in red. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout, and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors), then the Select a System dialog displays. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing, and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119

9 In the Select a System dialog, select CHWR. 10 Click OK. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green.

11 On the Options Bar, click Settings. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes, duct, structural beams, or architectural components. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. 13 Click Cancel. 14 On the Generate Layout tab, verify that Solutions is selected. 15 On the Options Bar: ■

For Solution Type, select Perimeter. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. It does not reference the architecture.

■

450.. For Inset, enter 450

■

Click

(Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected.

120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System System

16 Click Finish Layout. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. 17 Optionally, to display the path with thinner lines, click View tab Lines.

➤

Graphics panel ➤ Thin

18 Place the cursor over the piping, and press Tab 3 times. With each Tab, Tab, the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■

Branch in a pipe network.

■

Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects.

■

Branch in a pipe network up to a pi ece of equipment.

View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Verify the flow In a previous exercise, you modified the fl ow value for the WSHPs; the flow for each WSHP is 0.75 L/s. 19 In the drawing area, select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler.


The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.

20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, verify that the value for F low is 1.50 L/s, and click OK. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0.75 L/s). 22 Select the boiler, and access its instance properties.

23 Under Mechanical, notice that the Water Flow is 1.50 L/s, and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 24 Press Esc . Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left.

122 | Chapter Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System System

26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 27 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 28 In the Project Browser, under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design, and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. On the Options Bar, the Number of Elements is now 8. Logically, the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).

31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 32 Click Finish Editing System.


Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously, you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. Next, you physically close the CHWR loop, which propagates flow throughout the system. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.

34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe.

35 Using the drag control, extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap, as shown. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.

Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected, access its instance properties. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, note that the value for Flow is 4.94 L/s, and click Cancel. 38 Using the same method, review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6.44 L/s, and then close the Instance Properties dialog. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1.50 L/s, and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4.94 L/s, so the total flow of 6.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly.


Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area, select a WSHP, WSHP, and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial, the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). 40 In the Select a System dialog, select CHWS.

41 Click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■

For Solution Type, select Perimeter 1 of 5.

■

0.00%. For Slope, enter 0.00%.

■

450.. For Inset, enter 450 The inset is the distance from the pipe to the c onnection on the selected system component.

■

Click Settings.

■

In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset, and then click OK.

43 Click Generate Layout tab

➤

Generate Layout panel

➤

Remove.

44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution.


45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above.

The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. In a later exercise, you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 46 Click Modify.

47 In the drawing area, select the right vertical green sketch line in the path, as shown.

48 While pressing Ctrl , select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. (Both sections are at the same elevation.)


49 Select the 4-way arrow control, and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay), as shown.

50 Using the same method, select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe), and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved.

51 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe, or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 52 Close the file with or without saving it.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise, you manually lay out pipi ng to create a closed loop system. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physic al) connections and validate the pipe geometry. geometry. To create the piping system, you: ■

Connect the boiler to the return piping.

■

Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127

■

Add piping to close the supply loop.

■

Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.

NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. As you work in the training file, you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple, and the return pipes are magenta. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view vi ew.. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Building. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler, as shown. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it ’s easier to select components in 3D. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.

128 | Chapter Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System System

Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view, draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. connector.

6 Press Delete .

7 In the plan view, select the section of piping, as shown.


8 Move the piping: ■

Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

■

Click to specify the reference point.

■

Move the cursor up 100 mm.

■

Esc to clear the selection. Click to move the piping, and press Esc to

vi ew,, select the boiler. boi ler. 9 In the 3D view 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel

➤

Connect Into.

You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.


11 In the Select Connector dialog, click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water Water In, and click cl ick OK. 12 In the 3D view vi ew,, select the return pipe pi pe riser.

The connections are automatically created, and the boiler is connected to the return piping. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful, flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler

Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary, and the lower one is secondary. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. vi ew,, select the boiler. boi ler. 13 In the plan view 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top), and click Draw Pipe.


In a plan view, if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping, and you select 1 connector, the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector c onnector.. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Press Spacebar to Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■

Move the cursor to the right, enter 600 600,, and press Enter . You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.

■

381.. On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 381

■

Add another 600 section of pipe to the right.

■

Move the cursor down, and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump.


NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. As you place piping runs that are close together, it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 18 Press Esc twice. Esc twice. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.

19 In the plan view, select the primary base mounted pump. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel

➤

Connect Into.

21 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water Water In, and click OK. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump, and the appropriate fittings are created.


Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting, and select it, as shown.

24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow, elbow, you select the tee fitting, and click the minus symbol.

Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting, right-click the bottom connector, and click Draw Pipe. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump, and click to draw the pip e.


27 Move the cursor to the right, and when the connector point displays, click to connect to the pump.


28 Press Esc . 29 If necessary, zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view vi ew,, select the primary p rimary base mounted pump, right-cli ck the discharge connector, and click Draw Pipe.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 1200 1200.. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump, and click to create the pipe.


33 Press Esc .

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps; these pipe connections were created automatically.


Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view, zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump, as shown.

35 Using the method learned previously, upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.

36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■

In the plan view, select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump, right-click the bottom control on the tee, and click Draw Pipe.


■

Move the cursor down, type 300, and press Enter .

■

On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2850 2850..

■

Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown, and click to create the pipe.


37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. Next, you validate the flow through the system.


Validate Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view, select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe, right-click, and click Element Properties.

39 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, notice that Flow is 6.44 L/s. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 40 Click Cancel. 41 Using the same method, view the properties for the secondary pump. In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is .50 or 50% of the Flow, which is rounded up to 3.22 L/s (1/2 of 6.44 L/s). The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. When you create the pumps in parallel, you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 42 Click OK. 43 Press Esc . Connect the cooling tower Next, you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 44 In the 3D view, select the cooling tower, right-click, and click Element Properties. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog, di alog, notice that under Mechanical, for Cooling Water Flow, the value is 0 L/s, and click OK. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 46 Press Esc . 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 48 In the plan view, select the following pipes: ■

Supply pipe, as shown.


■

Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).

■

Lower pipe (outlet).


Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc .

50 In the 3D View, select the cooling tower, and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Water Flow is 6.44 L/s, and close the dialog.



Adding Valves In this exercise, you add valves to model the pipi ng for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). When the valve is open, the water bypasses the cooling cooli ng tower, and is heated by the boiler. You You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. tower.

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open.

Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling towe r 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view vi ew.. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower, as shown.


4 On the Options Bar, verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Ball Valve - 50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. The bypass valve is closed by default. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.

8 Press Esc twice. Esc twice.

Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve, and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal posi tion.

Adding Valves | 145

10 Press Esc .

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 12 Select M_Ball Valve - 50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.

14 Using the same method, place another M_Ball Valve - 50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower, parallel to the previously placed valve.


15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.

Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve, right-click, and click Element Properties.

18 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, verify that Flow is 0 L/s, and click OK. 19 Using the same method, validate the following flow values: ■

For the pipe below the bypass val ve, validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s.

■

For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower), validate that the Flow is 6.44 L/s.

Adding Valves | 147

For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooli ng tower), validate that the Flow is 6.44 L/s.

■

Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. In heating mode, you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. You You bypass the cool ing tower with hot water coming from the boiler boil er.. 20 Select the bypass valve, and select M_Ball Valve - 50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open posi tion), and select M_Ball Valve - 50-150 mm Bypass : 1 00 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Using the method you just learned, validate the following: ■

The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s.

■

The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s.

■

The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe i s 6.44 L/s.


Sizing Pipe In this exercise, you verify automatically calculated pipe siz e and flow parameters. Initially, you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. The color-coded display allows you to quickl y see differing sizes and flow of piping. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open.


Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view vi ew.. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system, as shown.

4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, select Pipe Color Fill - Flow, and click OK. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding i n the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.

Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend, and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, for Schemes, click Pipe Color Fill - Size, and click OK. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 8 Press Esc to Esc to clear the selection.

Sizing Pipe | 149

Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps, press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you ’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of eq uipment), and click to select the branch.

11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■

Pa/m. Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter 220 Pa/m.

■

m/s. Select And, and for Velocity, Velocity, enter 1.5 m/s.

■

Under Constraints, for Branch Sizing, select Larger of Connector and Calculated.

■

Click OK.

The piping increases in diameter based on the frictio n and velocity values specified. 13 Press Esc . IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. sizi ng. The most common cause of these errors err ors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe, or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.



Inspecting the System In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector, you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open.

Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Building. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.

3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 4 Click System Inspector tab

➤


➤

Inspect.

Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for bo th the main and the branches in the pipe system. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.

Inspecting the System | 151

NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. clearly. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. An inspection flag reports the section number, flow, and pressure information including pressure loss. This information helps you modi fy the system design, as required. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).

Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pip e (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level, as shown.


Note that the Flow is 1.0 L/s, the Static Pressure is 41916.4 Pa, and the Pressure Loss i s 7160.1 Pa. 7 Click System Inspector tab

➤


➤

Properties.

8 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Fluid Temperature, select 32° C, and click OK. 9 Using the same method, inspect Section 6 again, and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125.7. 10 Click Finish. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.

Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure, and to size pipe. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design, you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project, targeting those systems that need attention. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open.

Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel

➤

Check Pipe Systems.

Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Warnings Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. empty.

Checking Piping Systems | 153

NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system, the pipe is associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. As you learned when placing components, all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. If you place components without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system. After you assign components to a system, Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. After you have assigned all components to systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example, you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system, but the same component has a sanitar y system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel

➤

System Browser.

4 In the System Browser, right-click the Systems titlebar, and click View. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. 6 In the Project Browser, under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 7 In the System Browser, expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW; notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed, under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 9 Right-click CHWS, and click Show to view all of the system components. co mponents. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views; otherwise, click Close. 10 Using the same methods, expand the Unassigned folder, and confirm unassigned system components. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down, and sel ect Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design floor plan. 12 In the System Browser, right-click Hydronic Return, and click Expand All. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system.


13 Right-click CHWR, and click Sel ect to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned, confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.

Checking Piping Systems | 155

156

Creating an Electrical System

In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

157

158

Planning an Electrical System

7

In this lesson, you complete the planning p lanning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■

Specify electrical settings.

■

Define required lighting.

■

Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Color fill plan with required lighting levels

■

Create a space lighting analysis schedule

159

Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages, wiring, distribution systems, and d emand factors that are applied in the design. As you place components and create circuits, Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems, speeding up the design phase. In this exercise you review electrical settings. You also add a wiring type. Training File ■


(Open).

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, di alog, click Training Files, and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m.rvt.

Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab

➤


➤


2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■

In the left pane, expand Wiring - Wire Sizes.

■

Select Correction F actor. actor.

■

■

For Material, select Copper.

■

For Temperature, select 90.

Click New Correction Factor. ■

70. For Temperature, enter 70.

■

1.04.. For Factor, enter 1.04

■

Click OK.

Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane, select Wiring Types. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■

THHN. For Name, enter THHN.

■

For Material, select Copper.

160 | Chapter Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical Electrical System

■

For Temperature Rating, select 75.

■

For Insulation, select THHN.

■

For Max Size, enter 2000.

■

For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0.

■

Select Neutral Required.

■

For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size.

■

For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you all ow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■

240.. For Name, enter 240

■

240.. For Value, enter 240

■

220.. For Minimum, enter 220

■

250.. For Maximum, enter 250

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■

120/240. For Name, enter 120/240.

■

For Phase, select Single.

■

For Wires, select 3.

■

For L-L Voltage, select 240.

■

For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■

For Load Classification, select Power.

■

Under More Than, select 10000 VA.

■

Click Split.

■

50. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50.

■

Click OK.


Specifying Electrical Settings | 161

Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Defining Required Lighting In this exercise, you specify the lighting level s that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you pl ace in the plan. Training File ■


(Open).

■


Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

Project Parameters.

2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data: ■

Level . For Name, enter Required Lighting Level.

■

For Discipline, select Electrical.

■

For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance.

■

For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting.

■

Under Categories, select Spaces.

■

Verify that Instance is selected.

■

Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.


6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel

➤

Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities.


For Category, select Spaces.

■

Requirements . For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements.

■

Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Levels.

■

Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. fi rst row, enter Open Office. 13 In the Key Name column of the first Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 485 485.. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

Defining Required Lighting | 163

The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level.

■

Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.


25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned assi gned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The only way to change the value is to either ei ther select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule fo r the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in i n the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis sc hedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which i s the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File ■


(Open).

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■


Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces.

■

Under Schemes, click

(Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■

Levels . Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels.

■

For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

■

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 lx, and in the At Least column, enter 200, and press Enter .

■

Select the scheme for At Least 200.00 lx, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 200 lx and click clic k Add, then the new value will be 400 lx. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add, then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

■

With the scheme for At Least 200. 00 lx still selected, click

■

Select the scheme for 400 lx, and click

■

900.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 500 lx, enter 900.00, ENTER.

■

800.00, and press ENTER. ENTER. Select the scheme for 450.00 lx, enter 800.00,

■

Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown.

■

Click OK.


(Add Value) again.

(Add Value) five times.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel

➤

Legend.

8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■

For Space Type, select Spaces.

■

For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting.

■

Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel

➤

Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities.



■

For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

Availabl e Fields, double-click double-cl ick Number, Name, Level, Average 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. Delta.

■

For Discipline, select Electrical.

■

For Type, select Illuminance.


■

■

For Formula, click Browse. ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination.

■

Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse. ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level.

■

Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line.

■

On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta.

■

Click Conditional Format. ■

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

■

lx. For Value, enter -55 lx and 55 lx.

■

Click Background C olor. ■

In the Color dialog, for Custom Colors, select Red.

■

Click OK three times.


The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.


170

Designing an Electrical System

8

In this lesson, you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits, power circuits, and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. You learn to: ■

Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels.

■

Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures.

■

Create power loads.

■

Use the System Browser to check your design.

■

Balance wire sizes and breaker service.

■

Create a panel schedule.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise, you place lighting fixtures in the drawing, using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. First, you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or li ghting levels. Then, as you place lighting fixtures, you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied.

171

Training File ■


(Open).

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m.rvt.

Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 - Lighting CF view is open. 2 In the drawing area, select the color legend.

3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■

Under Schemes, for the Spaces Category, select Average Estimated Illumination. You can create additional color schemes, then modif y the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.

■

Under Scheme Definition, select the color for Less Than 200 lx.

■

In the Color dialog, for Basic Colors, select Orange.

■

Click OK.

5 Click OK. Notice that the Library has an average estimated il lumination less than 200 lx. By using orange as the color for this range, we can quickly identify those areas of the buildi ng that do not meet the specified lighting requirements.

6 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the legend. 7 In the Project Browser, expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Sp ace Lighting Analysis view. 8 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting Ceiling plan. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

172 | Chapter Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical Electrical System

10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order, with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. corner. 13 Click the Level 2 - Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area, zoom to space Library 219.

As you add lighting fixtures to the Library, Library, the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format), and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/- 5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. The col or fill plan also i ndicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc, which is the lowest value in the specified range. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library, all three of these colored fields will wil l clear to white, indicating a value val ue greater than 0 fc. The red field will clear once

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173

the +/- 5 fc range is satisfied. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared, however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specifi ed value because of the +/- 5 fc range. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) - 277V. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan, so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically, the fixtures will move accordingly. 18 Click to place the fixture. 19 Press ESC to ESC to end the command.

In the Space Lighting Analysis view, the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.

20 Select the lighting fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog, verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.


23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.


32 Press ESC . The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Li brary 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.


35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.


The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.


37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.


The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.


43 Press ESC to ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the li ght fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File ■


(Open).

■


Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view, scroll to view space space Library 219. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view, zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.

5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■

Click Edit Type.

■

In the Type Properties dialog:

■

■

Click Duplicate.

■

In the Name dialog, for Name enter and click OK.

VA. Under Electrical Loads, for Apparent Load, enter 162.00 VA.


■

F15. Under Identity Data, for Type Mark, enter F15.

■

Under Electrical, for Lamp, select T5 [HO].

■

Under Photometrics, click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■

.93. In the Light Loss Factor dialog, for Ballast Loss Factor, enter .93.

■

For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation, enter .85. .85.

■

Click OK.

■

Click Apply. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule, the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated.

■

Under Photometrics, click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.

■

In the Select File dialog, select 463T5_S.ies and click Open.

■

Under Photometrics, click the value for Initial Intensity. Intensity. ■

■

Under Photometrics, click the value for Initial Color. ■

■

lm, and click OK. In the Initial Intensity dialog, select Luminous Flux, specify 15000.00 lm,

In the Initial Color dialog, for Color Preset, select Xenon and click OK.

Click OK twice.

7 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the fixture. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 9 In space Library 219, select the top center fixture. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab

➤

Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you add switches, junction boxes, and receptacles to your design.

Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches fo r the lighting switches and the receptacles i n your project. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Training File ■


(Open).

■


Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area, zoom to space Computer Lab 222.

Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles | 183

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor - Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared - 277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host, it is only previewed when the cursor i s over a wall. 7 Click to place the switch.


8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.

9 Press ESC to ESC to end the command. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Load Family dialog, browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Select M_Junction Boxes - NoLoad.rfa and click Open. The element type M_Junction Boxes - NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.


14 Press ESC to ESC to end the command. 15 Select the junction box. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■

2750.. Under Constraints, for Level 2 - Offset, enter 2750 NOTE When entering values, you can enter a space to separate the unit values.

■

JB-1NL. Under Identity Data, for Mark, enter JB-1NL.

■

Under Electrical, note the Number of Poles is 1.

■

Click Edit Type.

■

In the Type Properties dialog, note that Apparent Load is set to 0.

■

Click OK twice.

18 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the junction box. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipli ne) ➤ Power - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 21 In the drawing area, zoom to space Library 219.


22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel

➤

System Browser.

NOTE If necessary, dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 23 In the System Browser, right-click the a column heading and click View the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical.

➤

Systems. Right-click

24 For any column, right-click and click Column Settings. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■

Click Check None.

■

Expand General.

■

Select Size, Space Name, Space Number, and Number of Elements.

■

Expand Electrical.

■

Select Load, Distribution System, and Voltage.

■

Click OK.

26 In the System Browser, expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219.

This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank.


27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.

30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.

31 Close the System Browser. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.

34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.

35 Select the dimension and enter 3650 3650..


The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter.

36 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown.

38 Select the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 40 On the Options Bar, select Copy and Multiple. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle, move the cursor along the wall, and enter 3650 and press ENTER. ENTER.


42 Move the cursor down, enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

43 Press ESC to ESC to end the command.


Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.


48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the d istribution systems in your plan. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans, you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical


equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2), and work toward the higher voltage, main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).

In this exercise you also become more famili ar with the wiring settings, then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Training File ■


(Open).

■


Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area, zoom to the space Electrical 220.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appl iance Panelboard - 208V MCB - Surface: 100A.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193

5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.

7 Press ESC to ESC to end the command. 8 Select the panelboard. 9 On the Options Bar, for Distribution System, select 120/208 Wye. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■

20. Under Electrical - Loads, for Max. #1 Pole Breakers, enter 20.

■

PP-2B. For Panel Name, enter PP-2B.

■

Click OK.

12 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - 480V MCB - Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.

14 Select the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar, for Distribution System, select 480/277 Wye. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■

20. Under Electrical - Loads, for Max. #1 Pole Breakers, enter 20.

■

For Panel Name, enter LP-2B. LP-2B. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.

■

Click OK.

18 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the panelboard.


Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 20 In the drawing area, zoom to space Instruction 221.

21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 23 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and for Category, select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel

➤

Power.

The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit, which is the logical connection between the elements.


25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel

➤

Select Panel.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.


27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel

➤

Arc.

28 Press ESC to ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.


31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

32 Press ESC . 33 Select the switch on the right.

34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.


35 Select the left three-way switch, right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel

➤

Arc.

38 Press ESC to ESC to end the command.


39 Using the same method, add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit, and create permanent wiring. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 42 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and for Category, select Wires. Click OK. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■

Under Electrical - Loads, for Hot Conductors, enter 2.

■

Click OK.

Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4.

45 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create circuits without showing wire.

Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits, except without wire. Training File ■


(Open).

■


Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area, zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.


4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit.

5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab

➤

Edit Circuit panel

➤

Add To Circuit.

7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting l ighting sensor. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab

➤

Edit Circuit panel

➤

Select Panel.

➤

Finish Editing Circuit.

9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220.

10 Click Edit Circuit tab

➤

Edit Circuit panel

Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel

➤

System Browser.

12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 13 In the System Browser, right-click on the Systems heading, and click View Electrical.

➤

Systems and

14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■

Expand General and review the settings.

■

Expand Electrical, and verify that Load, Distribution System, Voltage, Rating, and Voltage Drop are selected.

■

Click OK.

16 In the System Browser, expand Power. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B, and then expand circuit 1. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221.

Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201

18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area, zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

➤

Element panel ➤ Element

di alog, under Electrical, change c hange the Voltage to 277V. 277V. Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, 22 With the junction box still selected, right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab

➤

Edit Circuit panel

➤

Add To Circuit.

26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Co mputer Lab 222. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab

➤

Edit Circuit panel

➤


28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 TAB 3 times to view the circuit.

30 Close the System Browser. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel


Deselect Leader. Leader.

■

Click Tags.


➤

Tag by Category.

33 In the Tags dialog: ■

For Lighting Fixtures, select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard.

■

Click OK.

34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 35 Press ESC to ESC to end the command. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog, click Edit Type. 39 In the Type Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Type Mark, enter FR4. FR4. 40 Click OK twice. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 41 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the fixture. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and cli ck Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab

➤

➤

Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Click Yes.

Label panel ➤ Edit Label.

44 In the Edit Label dialog, notice the label parameters and click Cancel. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel

➤

Create Similar.

46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 47 In the drawing area, click below the first one to place it.

48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■

Under Category Parameters, select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label

.

■

Select Wrap between parameters only.

■

For Circuit Number, select Break.

■

Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area.

Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203

■

Deselect Break and for Suffix, enter a comma, and cli ck Apply.

■

Click OK.

49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left.

51 Click

➤

Save As ➤ Family.

52 In the Save As dialog, for File Name, enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag.rfa. Tag.rfa . Click Save. 53 Click Create tab

➤

Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.

54 Select all of the tags, click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Tag.

➤

Element Panel ➤ drop-down, and

Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 57 In the Filter dialo g, click Check None, and for Category, select Lighting Fixture Tags. Click OK. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch _Switch ID Tag: Standard. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 59 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel

➤

Tag All.

Tag: Standard and 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: click Apply. Click OK. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a switch system.

Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Training File ■


■



(Open).

Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area, zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel

➤

Switch.

5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel

➤

Add to System.

➤

Select Switch.

➤

Finish Editing System.

7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel 9 Select the occupancy oc cupancy sensor. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel

11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 AB 4 times to see the switch system.

12 Select the occupancy oc cupancy sensor. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical Lighting, for Switch ID, enter a. Click OK. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID.

Creating a Switch System | 205

15 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel

➤

Switch.

18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel

➤

Add to System.

➤

Select Switch.

20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel

22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel

➤

Switch Properties.

24 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, for switch ID, enter b. Click OK. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel

➤

Finish Editing System.

Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID .


26 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a circuit and size wire.

Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Circuits are used for power, lighting, and data systems. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Training File ■


(Open).

■


Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area, zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and for Category, select Electrical Fixtures. Click OK. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel

➤

➤

Power.

Select Panel.

7 In space Electrical 220, select the PP-2B panel.

8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel

➤

Arc.

9 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the wires. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel, and click Element Properties. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Loads, for Hot Conductors, enter 2. Click OK. 12 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the wire. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks.

Creating Power Loads | 207

13 Select the wire again, and in the drawing area, click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 14 Click Insert tab

➤

Load from Library panel

➤

Load Family.

15 In the Load Family dialog, navigate to Metric Library select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa, and click Open. 16 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

➤

Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks,


17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog, select Wiring, and in the right pane, for Ground Wire Tick Mark, select M_ Hook Hoo k Wire Tick Mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark, select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK.

The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222, press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring, and click to select the circuit.


21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel

➤

Select Panel.

22 In space Electrical 220, select the PP-2B panel. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel

➤

Arc.

24 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the wires. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221, as shown.

26 Press Delete . 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 28 In the drawing area, in space Instruction 221, click the connector of the first receptacle, click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc, and then clic k the connector of the second receptacle as shown.

29 In space Instruction 221, add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221, and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222, as shown.

Creating Power Loads | 209

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220, and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.

Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you balance the loads for your design.


Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels, p anels, then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Finally, you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Training File ■


Open.

■


Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. This wil l reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to o ne phase being overloaded. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 2 In the drawing area, zoom to space Electrical 220. 3 In the Electrical space, select panel LP-2B.

4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog, click Rebalance Loads. After re-balancing loads, the distribution is shifted, but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. Had there been a greater imbalance, the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. 6 Click OK. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected, click Electrical Circuits tab Properties.

➤

System Tools panel ➤ Circuit

8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■

Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#1 2, 1-#12, 1-#12.

■

Under Electrical-Loads, for Rating, enter 30A. 30A. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.

■

Scroll down, and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10, 1-#10, 1-#10.

■

Click OK.

Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211

Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B.

10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab

➤

Edit Circuit panel

➤

Edit Circuit panel

➤

Remove from Circuit.

12 Select panel PP-2B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab

➤


A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 14 Close the warning dialog. 15 Select panel PP-2B. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel

➤

Power.

A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 17 Close the warning dialog. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit, under Electrical - Loads, for Rating, enter 25A, 25A, and click OK. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected, click Mod ify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit, under Electrical - Loads, for Rating, enter 40A, 40A, and click OK. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected, click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 24 Click Select Panel, select the transformer TP-2B, and click Finish Editing Circuit. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 25 Press ESC to ESC to deselect the panel. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a panel schedule.


Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise, you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Training File ■


(Open).

■


Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel

➤

Panel Schedule.

3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■

Click Clear Selection.

■

Select PP-2B.

■

Click OK.

The Panel Schedule Report displays. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel, the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 4 Close the report. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and open E601 - Panel Schedules. 6 In the Project Browser, under Reports

➤

Panel Schedule, drag PP-2B onto the sheet.

7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet, click Modify Schedule Graphics tab panel ➤ Element Properties.

➤

Element

8 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Appearance, click Edit. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is i ncluded on a sheet. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■

Under Header Text, Text, for Font, select Berlin Sans F B.

■

Under Header Text, for Font Size, enter 5 mm. mm.

■

Under Header Text, select Bold and Italic.

■

mm. Under Body Text, for Font Size, enter 4 mm.

10 Click OK twice. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you use the System Browser to check your design.

Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the desi gn and locating components in your project. You You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.

Creating a Panel Schedule | 213

Training File ■


(Open).

■


View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel

System Browser.

➤

3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 4 In the System Browser: ■

Right-click a column heading, and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser.

■

Expand Unassigned. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212.

■

Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1, each with a load of 180VA. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.

5 In the drawing area, select space Lounge 212. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. TAB once. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1.

7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. AB once. In the System Browser, notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall, press TAB once, AB once, and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel 10 Click Edit Circuit tab

➤

Edit Circuit panel

11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall.


➤

➤

Add to Circuit.

Edit Circuit.

12 Click Edit Circuit tab

➤

Edit Circuit panel

➤


In the System Browser, notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel

➤

Check Circuits.

14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector, click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 15 In the dialog, under Warnings, expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 16 Close the details dialog. 17 In the drawing area, zoom to space Electrical 214. 18 Select panel LP-2C.

19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 20 On the Options Bar, for Panel, select MDP-1. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab

➤

Edit Circuit panel

➤


Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

Checking Your Design Design | 215

216

Creating a Plumbing System

In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

217

218

9

Planning a Plumbing System

Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project; planning is critical to a successful design. In this lesson, you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■

Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.

■

Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.

■

Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.

■

Adding a pipe size.

Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you pl ace in your plumbing plan. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. In this exercise, in addition to loading existing famili es, you create a PVC pipe type, and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Training File ■

Click

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m.rvt.

➤

Open.

Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, expand Families click Properties.

➤

Pipes ➤ Pipe Types, right-click PVC - Sanitary, and

3 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 4 In the Name dialog, type PVC - Vent, Vent, and click OK.

219

5 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for: ■

Preferred Junction Type, select Tee.

■

Tee, Tee, select M_Tee Sanitary - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV: Standard.

■

Tap, Tap, select None.

■

Cross, select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV: Standard.

6 Click OK. In the Project Browser, under Pipe Types, PVC - Vent is listed. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\M_Trap Metric\M_Trap P - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV.rfa. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. Vent. 10 On the Selection panel, click Modify. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families

➤

Pipe Fittings.

Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog, click Pipe Settings. 13 In the right panel, for Pipe Connector Tolerance, enter 10°. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings, refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 15 For System Type, sel ect Sanitary. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.

■

For Offset, enter -1250.

17 In the left pane, under Pipe Settings

➤

Conversion, select Branch.

18 For System Type, sel ect Sanitary. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane, select Pipe Settings

➤

Sizes.

21 In the right pane, for Material, select Plastic. 22 Click New Size. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog, for Nominal, enter 45.000 mm. mm. 24 For Inside Diameter, enter 46.006 mm. mm. 25 For Outside, enter 54.293 mm. mm. 26 Click OK. 27 For the new pipe size, verify that Used in Size Lists and Used i n Sizing are selected, and click OK. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.

220 | Chapter Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing Plumbing System

Designing a Plumbing System

10

In this lesson, you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men ’s room in a commercial building, including pl umbing fixtures, sanitary piping, vent, and hot and cold water piping. You learn to: ■

Place sanitary plumbing fixtures.

■

Create the sanitary plumbing system.

■

Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system.

■

Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system.

■

Create the cold water system, and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.

■

Create the hot water system, add a hot water heater, and create piping to physically connect the si nks to the hot water system.

221

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men ’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File ■

Click

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

➤

Open.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men ’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing Plumbing System System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toil et space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc .

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20 mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer. closer.


Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel

➤

System Browser.

16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom o f the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and c old water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components l isted under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you y ou through creating the piping for the men ’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor floo r drain. You then use Revit MEP ’s Layout Path tools to create sloped pi ping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File ■

Click

➤

Open.

226 | Chapter Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing Plumbing System

■


Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel

➤

Sanitary.

The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. li sted. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.


Create physical connections 14 In the plan view, select one of the components in the system, for example, a toilet. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel

➤

Generate Layout.

16 In the Select a System dialog, select Sanitary 107, and click OK. A preview of the piping layout displays.

17 Click Generate Layout tab

➤


➤

Place Base.

The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. fl ow. toil et, at the midpoint of the detail lines, l ines, as 18 Click to select a poi nt to the left of the accessible toilet, shown.

The base is placed.


19 On the Options Bar, for Diameter mm, and for Offset, enter -1225. -1225. Di ameter,, select 100 mm, The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 20 On the Generate Layout panel, click Solutions. 21 On Options Bar, for Solution Type, select Intersections, and click Settings. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pi pe layout. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, select Main. 23 For Pipe Type, select PVC - Sanitary. Sanitary. 24 For Offset, enter -350 mm. mm. 25 In the left pane, select Branch. 26 For Pipe Type, select PVC - Sanitary. Sanitary. 27 For Offset, enter -350 mm, mm, and click OK. The default settings are automatically modified. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements, it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 28 On the Options Bar, for Slope, enter 1.05%. 1.05%. The positive value slopes the pipe pip e down toward the base point. 29 On the Options Bar, click

(Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected.

You accept this suggested solution, sol ution, and modify it to meet project requirements. 30 Click Modify.


Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl , select the vertical route path segments.

32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow), and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.


vi ew,, use the ViewCube to orient the view, as shown. 33 In the 3D view

34 Click Modify. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets, and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main, as shown.


36 Using the previous method, adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

37 On the Generate Layout panel, click Finish Layout.


Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing - Overall. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures, and press Tab Tab 4 times to check connectivity. ■

1=Branch in a network

■

2=Branch in a network including the branch objects

■

3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment

■

4=Network (including fixtures)

39 Click to select the fitting to the drain, and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed, select the fitting and click


to reorient it.

40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting, and check the slope co ntrol. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet, as shown.


Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise, you continue with the work from the last exercise, adding sinks i n the men ’s room, and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open.

Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the men ’s room (Space Male 107).

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. Selector, under M_Lavatory - Rectangular, select 560 mmx560 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, mm - Public. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line, as shown.


7 Click Modify. 8 Select the sink. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■

Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

■

On the Options Bar, select Multiple.

■

Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.

■

711.2, and press Enter to Enter to create a second Move the cursor up above the reference line, enter 711.2, sink.


■

Move the cursor up above the reference line, enter 711.2, 711.2, and press Enter to Enter to create the third sink.

■

Press Esc .

Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 11 In the System Browser, expand Sanitary

➤

Sanitary 107.

12 In the drawing area, select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel, click Add To System. 15 Click the 3 sinks.


16 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 In the 3D view, use the ViewCube to orient the view, as shown, and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.

20 Select the fitting, and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

21 Select the tee.


22 In the plan view, with the tee fitting selected, right-click the top connector (sanitary connector), and click Draw Pipe.

23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 24 On the Options Bar, for Slope, enter 1.05%. 1.05%. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink, press Spacebar , and click to draw the pipe. When you press the Spacebar, the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.

26 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 760 mm, mm, and click Apply. 27 Click Modify.


3D view shown for clarity

28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 29 In the Type Selector, under M_Wye 45 Deg Do uble - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, DWV, select Standard. 30 In the 3D view, move the cursor over the stub pipe, and when the vertical center line displays, click to place the fitting.

31 Click Modify. 32 Select the double wye fitting, and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.


33 With the fitting selected, on the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 150 mm, mm, and press Enter . 34 Press Esc . Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view, double-click the section head to open the section view.

36 In the section view, zoom in to the double wye fitting. In the next steps, you add pipe segments to the do uble wye. 37 Select the fitting, right-click the right connector, and click Draw Pipe. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■

mm, and press Enter . Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right, enter 305 mm,


Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP ’s listening dimension tool, which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. ■

Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink, and click to place the pipe.

40 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method, draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°), as shown.

42 Click Modify. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.


44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns wi th the centerline of the horizontal piping, and press Esc .

Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 46 In the section view, draw a selection box around the left sink to select it, right-click the bottom connector, and click Draw Pipe. 47 Move the cursor down, press Spacebar , enter 150 mm, mm, and press Enter to Enter to create the segment of pipe.

48 Click Modify. 49 Using the same method, draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks.


50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 51 In the Type Selector, under M_Trap P - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, DWV, select Standard. 52 In the plan view, click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.

You can see in the 3D view that it i t is connected. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 53 Using the same method, place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 54 Click Modify. 55 In the 3D view, select the P-Trap on the left, and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.

56 Using the same method, rotate the P-Trap P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.


57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■

In the 3D view, select the left l eft P-Trap,.

■

Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel

■

Select the double wye pipe on the left. The piping is connected and the appropriate fi ttings are automatically created.

➤

Connect Into.

58 Using the same method, connect the right sink to the double wye. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■

In the 3D view, click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.

■

Click in the plan view.

■

In the plan view, right-click the left connector on the P-Trap, and click Draw Pipe.

■

mm, and press Enter . Move the cursor to the left, enter 150 mm,

■

Click Modify.


■

In the 3D view, while pressing Ctrl , select the section of pipe you just drew, and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye.

■

Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points, and select a proposed solution.

■

In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select PVC Sanitary. Sanitary.

■

On the Routing Solutions panel, click Finish to select the recommended solution.

■

Press Esc .

Specify a slope vi ew,, while pressing Ctrl , select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks, as shown. 60 In the 3D view


61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 62 On the Options Bar, for Slope, verify that 1.05% is selected. 63 On the Slope Editor panel, click Finish. You have appropriately sloped slo ped the pipe. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified, and verify the slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.

Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise, you continue with the work on the sanitary system, adjusting the sanitary stack.

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open.


Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) following views:

➤

■

Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design.

■

Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1.

■

3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing- Overall.

Design ➤ Plumbing - Design, and open the

2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile, and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 3 In the Section view, select the elbow fitting on the right, as shown.

4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 5 Select the tee, right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 - Fl oor level line, and cl ick to draw the pipe.

7 On the Selection panel, click Modify. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, DWV, select Standard. 10 In the 3D view, select the vertical stack, and click the intersection to place the fitting.

Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. mm. 15 Press Esc .

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.


19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.


Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings Main.

➤

Conversion, and click

4 In the right pane, fo r System Type, select Domestic Hot Ho t Water. Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water Water..

■

For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water Water..

■

mm. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water Water system. (Remember to specify speci fy Domestic Cold Water Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel bottom of the screen.

➤

System Browser, and position the browser at the

14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary S anitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components pl aced earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.



➤

Domestic Cold Water.

19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar: ■

107. For System Name, enter DCW 107.

■

For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Domes tic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel

➤

Connect Into.

24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.


26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar: ■

mm. For Diameter, select 20 mm.

■

mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm.

■

0%.. For Slope, enter 0%

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the mm, and press Enter . existing pipe, enter 140 mm,

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, mm, and press Enter . 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.


39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab

➤

Layout panel

➤

Connect Into.

42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.


44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pip e.


Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.


Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel bottom of the screen.

➤

System Browser, and position the browser at the

5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned fol der, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view vi ew,, while pressing Ctrl , select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257


➤

Domestic Hot Water.

8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, Tankless, select 2.3 L . 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. Water, Default Domestic 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Ho t Water, Cold Water, Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. ( The folders are created according to the connectors c onnectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men ’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.


18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view vi ew,, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify: ■

mm. Diameter: 25 mm.

■

Offset: 2000 mm. mm.

■

0%.. Slope: 0%

Press Enter . 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, mm, and press Enter . 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, mm, and press Enter . 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.


Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Di ameter,, enter 25 mm, Press Enter . 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, mm, and press Enter . 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.


39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, mm, and press Enter . 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.


43 In the 3D view, select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal), and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 44 Select the horizontal pipe pi pe that you just drew.

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool, connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.




264

Creating a Fire Protection System

In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

265

266

11

Planning a Fire Protection System

The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In this tutorial, you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model, with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model, see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. In this lesson, you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor o f an office building.

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. If the tutorial training files are not present, go to http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.

Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise, you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. You create a new pipe type, and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. Training File ■

Click

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m.rvt.

➤

Open ➤ Project.

Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Families

➤

Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.

2 Right-click Standard, and click Duplicate. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type.

267

3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2), cli ck Rename, and enter Fire Protection Wet. Wet. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet, and click Properties. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. Next, you modify the type properties of the pipe. 5 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Material, select Carbon Steel, and then click OK. 6 In the Project Browser, verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.

8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■

In the left pane, under Pipe Settings

■

For System Type, select Fire Protection Wet. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display.

■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.

■

For Offset, verify that 2800 is selected. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing, so the pipe main will be offset from level l evel 2. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches.

■

In the left pane, select Pipe Settings

■

For System Type, select Fire Protection Wet.

■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.

■

For Offset, verify that 2800 is specified. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views.

➤

➤

Conversion, select Main.

Conversion ➤ Branch.

NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes, duct, structural beams, or architectural components. 9 Click OK. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. However, you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise, you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection protec tion system and modified its type properties. p roperties. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. In the next exercise, you create project parameters and work with schedules.

Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise, you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. parameter. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces i n the bottom portion to another zone.

268 | Chapter Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection Protection System System

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Piping Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

Project Parameters.

3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■

Zone. Under Parameter Data, for Name, enter Sprinkler Zone.

■

For Group parameter under, select Fire Protection.

■

Under Categories, select Spaces.

5 Click OK twice. 6 In the drawing area, select space Instruction 221 as shown, right-click, and click Element Properties. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Fire Protection, for Sprinkler Zone, enter Zone 1, 1, and then click OK. 8 Using a crossing window, select the upper half of the building. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.

Determining Zone Requirements | 269

9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 10 In the Filter dialog, verify that only Spaces are selected, and click OK. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Fire Protection, for Sprinkler Zone, select Zone 1, and then click OK. 13 Using the same method, filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces, and then access instance properties.

14 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Fire Protection, for Sprinkler Zone, enter Zone 2, 2, and then click OK. 15 Press Esc to Esc to clear the selection. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise, you create schedules for sprinkler design, to which you add various parameters, including a calculated value p arameter. arameter. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection Protection System System

Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Piping Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel

➤



Under Category, select Spaces. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added.

■

Schedule . For Name, enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule.

■

Select Schedule keys.

■

Type. For Key name, enter Protection Area Construction Type.

■

Click OK.

Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■

Spacing. Under Parameter data, for Name, enter Maximum Spacing.

■

For Type of Parameter, select Length.

■

For Group parameter under, select Fire Protection.

■

Click OK.

6 Using the same method, create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. 7 Click OK. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab. 9 On the Formatting tab, select Maximum Spacing, and click Field Format. 10 In the Format dialog, do the following: ■

Clear Use project settings.

■

For Units, select Millimeters.

■

For Rounding, select 0 decimal places.

■

For Unit symbol, select mm.

11 Click OK twice. The schedule displays.

Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule, double-click on each column separator. 14 Select the new header, and on the ribbon, click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab panel ➤ Rows: New.

➤

Schedule

15 In the new row: ■

Obstructed-Combustible . In the Protection Area Type column, enter Light, Obstructed-Combustible.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271

■

4575.. In the Maximum Spacing column, enter 4575

■

40, and press Enter . In the Maximum Coverage Area column, enter 40, NOTE The units of measure display automatically, based on the parameter settings you specified previously.

16 Using the same method, add more schedule data: Protection Area Type

Maximum Spacing

Maximum Coverage Area

Light, Obstructed-Noncombustible Light, Unobstructed Extra, Obstructed-Combustible Extra, Obstructed-Noncombustible Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra, Unobstructed Ordinary, Ordinary, Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary, Ordinary, Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary, Ordinary, Unobstructed

Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■


■

Schedule. For Name, enter Sprinkler Schedule.

■

Click OK.


➤


Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■

In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, double-click in the order listed: ■

Number

■

Name

■

Sprinkler Zone

■

Level

■

Area

■

Protection Area Construction Type

■

Maximum Coverage Area

■

Maximum Spacing

■

Click Calculated Value.

■

In the Calculated Value dialog: ■

Sprinklers. For Name, enter Minimum Sprinklers.

■

For Discipline, select Common.

■

For Type, select Number. Number.

■

For Formula, click

■

In the Fields dialog, select Area, and click OK.

■

Enter the formula operator / after Area, and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area.

.

Click OK. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 19 Click the Formatting tab. 20 On the Formatting tab, select Minimum Sprinklers, and click Field Format. 21 In the Format dialog: ■

Clear Use default settings.

■

For Units, select Fixed.

■

For Rounding, select 0 decimal place.

22 Click OK twice. The Sprinkler Schedule displays.


Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level.

■

Select Header and Blank line.

■

For Then by, select Sprinkler Zone.

■

Select Header and Blank line.

■

For Then by (second instance), select Number.

■

At the bottom of the dialog, select Grand totals, and select Totals only. only.

■

On the Formatting tab:

■

■

For Fields, select Sprinkler Zone.

■

Under Field formatting, select Hidden field.

■

For Fields, select Level, and then select Hidden field.

■

For Fields, select Minimum Sprinklers, and then click Field Format.

In the Format dialog, verify that Use default settings is selected.

26 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified.


27 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Filter, click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Filter by, select Level equals Level 2. 30 Click OK twice. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2.

Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area, use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. 33 Click in the grouped header cell, and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. Coverage . 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column, delete the word Maximum. Maximum.

Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■

On the Embedded Schedule tab, select Embedded Schedule.

■

For Category, select Sprinklers, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

■

On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available fields, do uble-click Type, System Name, and Count.

■

On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Count.

■

Under Field formatting, select Calculate totals.

■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, select Grand totals, and select Totals only. only.

38 Click OK 3 times.


Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser, double-click FP - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan Design. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 41 In the plan view, select space 221 Instruction, and click Modify Sp aces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fi re Protection, but their values are not determined. 43 Click Cancel. 44 In the schedule, select space 221 Instruction. 45 For Protection Area Construction Co nstruction Type, select Ordinary, Unobstructed. 46 With the space still selected, click in the floor plan to make it the active view, and access the instance properties. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule di splays in the dialog, and the spaci ng parameter values are evident. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Protection Area Construction Type, select Light, Unobstructed, and click OK. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 48 In the floor plan, use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 50 Access the instance properties. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Protection Area Construction Type, select Ordinary, Unobstructed. 52 Click OK. IMPORTANT A IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system, you are actually editing information in a database of building information. informa tion. As a result, each change is dynamic and immediately imm ediately propagates throughout your project. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

276 | Chapter Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection Protection System System



278

Designing a Fire Protection System

12

In this tutorial, you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. As you create the system, you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. By following the recommended workflow, you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. At the end of this tutorial, you will understand the process, methodology, and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. If the tutorial training files are not present, go to http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.

Adding Sprinklers In this exercise, you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view, hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. You You will use the sprinkler schedule that you c reated in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. As you place the sprinklers, you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. Training File ■

Click

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m.rvt.

➤

Open ➤ Project.

Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Ceiling Plans, and double-click Level 2 - FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.

279

2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building.

After placing the initial sprinkler, you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. When there is a small misalignment, the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. When this happens, there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 3 In the Project Browser, open Schedules/Quantities

➤

Sprinkler Schedule.

hori zontally. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile, and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally.

5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.

280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceil ing tile face. 9 In space Instruction 202, place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles, and click to place 3 sprinklers, as shown.

10 Press Esc twice. Esc twice. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added i n space 202. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system, because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.

Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to p lace other sprinklers in spaces 205, 206, and 207, because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 11 In the drawing area, while pressing Ctrl , select the sprinklers that you placed. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Also, the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 13 On the Options Bar, verify that Constrain is cleared, and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point.

Adding Sprinklers | 281

15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left, as shown, and then press Esc .

Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Next, you place non-hosted sprinklers. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section, you place non-hosted sprinklers, sp ecify a vertical offset, and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A , 200B, and 200C). You place the system components based o n the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 17 In the Project Browser, open Design Piping Plan - Design.

➤

FP - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection

18 Type WT, WT, and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.


19 In the floor plan, zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 In the 200A Corridor space, click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown, and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Because the sprinkler is not hosted, it ’s added to the space at an offset of 0.0. Next, you adjust the offset. 23 Right-click the sprinkler, and click Element Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 2900 mm. mm. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 - FP_Ceiling view. vi ew. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down, it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 25 Click OK. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected, click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 27 On the Options Bar: ■

Clear Group And Associate.

■

11. For Number, enter 11. This number is determined in the schedule, by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined.

28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start poi nt, move the cursor to the right, enter 4100,, and press Enter . 4100 29 Press Esc . Notice that the schedule updates, indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met.

30 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise, you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. In the next exercise, you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection), and with piping (physical connection).

Creating a Piping System In this exercise, you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers, and then creating the logical connection between these system components. After creating the logical connection, you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify


pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. MEP. IMPORTANT All IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Unlike logical connections (systems), physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. However, piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such a s sizing.

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan Pl an - Design is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel

➤

System Browser.

4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 5 Right-click the header, click View

➤

Systems, and select Piping.

6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. As you assign sprinklers to systems, they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces, as shown.


8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system, and assign the selected sprinklers to it. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout l ayout path.

In the System Browser, all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fi re Protection Wet folder to the new system fo lder, named Fire Protection Wet, within the Piping Systems folder fol der.. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected, you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears, place the cursor over a sprinkler, press Tab Tab, and select the system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser, double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet , and click Select. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red, indicating the logical connection. Next, you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system, select an initial piping layout, and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. 11 With the system still selected, click Piping Systems tab

➤

System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.


The Edit Piping System panel displays, providing system editing tools. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name, system equipment, and number of elements in the system. 12 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter FP Wet_Zone2. Wet_Zone2. 13 In the System Browser, expand Fire Protection Protectio n Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 15 In the drawing area, select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel

➤

Generate Layout.

The Generate Layout tools are activated, and a piping layout preview displays. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 17 Click Generate Layout tab Settings.

➤


➤

Solutions, and on the Options Bar, click

18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■

In the left pane, verify that Main is selected.

■

For Pipe Type, verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet is selected.

■

For Offset, verify that 2800.0 is specified. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2.

■

In the left pane, select Branch.

■

Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.

NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 19 Click OK. 20 On the Generate Layout panel, click Place Base. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component, as shown.

The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 22 On the Options Bar, for Diameter Di ameter,, select 150 mm. 23 For Offset, enter -3650. -3650. When the layout is finished, these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). 24 On the Generate Layout panel, click Solutions.

286 | Chapter Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection Protection System System


For Solution Type, verify that Network is selected.

■

Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions, and select solution 4. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run, and green represents branch lines).

Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. In general, the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■

Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction.

■

Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location, and then drag the

(elbow control)

(elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.

On the Generate Layout panel, click Modify. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. A

(parallel movement control) displays.


28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers, as shown. 29 Click Finish Layout. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting, or that offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. 32 If necessary, click View tab

➤

Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.


33 Close the file with or without saving it. Next, you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them, and then you create pip ing to physically connect them.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise, you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool, the Connect Into tool, and various manual pipe creation tools. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Piping Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in, and select the elbow fitting as shown.

3 If necessary, click View tab

➤

Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289

4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 5 In the drawing area, select any sprinkler that is part of the F P Wet_Zone2 system. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. IMPORTANT After IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers, air terminals, radiators, mechanical equipment, and so on) are logically connected by a system, and pipe or duct is created, you can select the pipe or duct, or a system component to display system tools. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add spri nklers to the system. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel, click Add To System. 8 In the corridor, draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers).

Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 9 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. The selected sprinklers are assigned assi gned to FP Wet_Zone2. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in i n the System Browser. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor, and click Modify Sprinklers tab Layout.


➤

Layout panel

➤

Generate

11 On the Generate Layout panel, verify that Solutions is selected. 12 On the Options Bar, for Solution Type, verify that Network is selected, and select solution 5. 13 Click Finish Layout.

The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 14 Close the System Browser. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area, select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 18 Click Finish Editing System. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. 20 Open Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection, and then tile the views. 21 In the Piping Plan, zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping, and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. sprinkler. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into, and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown.

23 View the result in the 3D view. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291

24 In the Piping Plan, pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 25 Select the sprinkler, right-click, and click Draw Pipe. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Options Bar, for Offset, select 2800. 28 In the drawing area, click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint, and then press Esc . 29 Using the same method, draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. Layout in 2D


Layout in 3D

Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 31 In the plan view, zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe, and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Because the whole system highlights, it ’s a visual indication that all components co mponents are connected correctly. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise, you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Piping Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel

➤

Section.

4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1 : 50. 5 Draw the section: ■

In the drawing area, click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line li ne start point.

■

Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293

6 Press Esc . Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area, double-click on the section head to open the section view.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties.



Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design.

■

For View Classification, select Design.

■

Section_Stair. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair.

■

For Default View Template, select MEP Section.

■

Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design Apply Default View Template.

➤

FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click

11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar . 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 2135 2135,, and press Enter .

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan P lan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select Hose Reel Cabinet - Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall ( host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modi fy.


23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter Di ameter,, select . 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection Intersectio n and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify. Modif y.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection Protection System

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. famil y. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, dial og, navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that M_Gate Valve - 50 mm is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pi pe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe.


35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in i n 3D.


Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pip es so that the pipes are a better fit with the desi gn specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they ’re tiled horizontally. horizo ntally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the p ipe geometry in the 3D view.


NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction distinct ion between sizing and manually changing the diameter, diamet er, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servici ng 2 sprinklers, it ’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don ’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter Di ameter,, select 25mm. 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel

➤

Tag by Category.

pi pe in the corridor. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag.rfa, Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar: ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected.

■

Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, clic k to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc . Modify the diameter of the main vi ew,, select the linked l inked architectural file. 16 In the 3D view 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Temporary Hide/Isolate

➤

Hide Category. Category.

By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection Protection System System

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pi pe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. 20 Click to select the main piping pip ing between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Di ameter,, select 100mm. 21 On the Options Bar, for Diameter The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.


22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 23 Close the 3D view, and maximize the floor plan. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 24 In the drawing area, select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205, as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, for Diameter Di ameter,, select 40mm. The pipe diameter is modified. 26 Using the same method, change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers, and then tag the piping as shown.

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection Protection System

27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise, you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You added tags to pipes, allowing you to i mmediately verify the pipe diameters. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. For additional practice, use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. In this tutorial, you created a wet fire protection system. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems, and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. MEP.


304

Documenting a Project

In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views, add annotations and dimensions, create details, and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

305

306

Creating Documentation Views

13

In this lesson, you begin the construction documentation for the building project. You learn to create: ■

a duplicate plan view, and apply a view template.

■

dependent views, matchlines, and view references.

■

a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.

■

callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.

Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise, you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan vi ew. ew. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. Training File ■

Click

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m.rvt.

➤

Open ➤ Project.

Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser, under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You select Duplicate because only o nly model elements are included incl uded in the original view vi ew.. If the view included detail graphics, you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. 2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Level 1, and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan, Plan , and click OK. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan, and click Properties.

307

5 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data Duct Plan-Documentation, and click OK.

➤

Default View Template, select HVAC

6 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan, and click Apply Default View Template. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style, and the floor plan is moved to its new location l ocation in the Project Browser hierarchy. hierarchy. 7 Close the file without saving.

Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale, you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller, more focused, views and put them on the sheet. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 2 Right-click the dependent view title, and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A, Plan_A , and click OK. 4 Using the same method, create dependent views for areas B and C. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views, to delineate splits in a large floor plan. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab

➤

Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties.

8 In the Instance Properties dialog, verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 9 Click OK. 10 In the drawing area, click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of o f the wing to specify the second point, as shown, and then press Esc .

308 | Chapter Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Documentation Views Views

12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H.

13 Press Esc twice. Esc twice. 14 Click Finish Matchline. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 16 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.

17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog, select Matchline: ■

For Line Color, click the current value.

■

In the Color dialog, select black, and click OK.

■

For Line Pattern, select Double Dash .

■

For Line Weight, select 11.

■

Click OK.

Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel

➤

View Reference.

19 In the drawing area, click above and below the modified matchline to create view references, and then press Esc .

Creating Dependent Views | 309

20 Select the upper view reference and, on the Options Bar, for Target Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 21 Using the same method, apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline, and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC HVAC Duct Plan_A. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries, as shown.

25 Using the same method, crop the dependent views for plans B and C. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B


Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C

26 Open Sheet M201, and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 Using the same method, drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. acti ve view, and zoom to each of the view references. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the vi ews are placed on sheets, indicating the detail and sheet number of each view.


Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise, you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser, under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views, right-click 3D Plumbing, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 Zoom in, and select the section box. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. You pin the view vi ew to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 4 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing, and click Properties. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■

Water. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter Plumbing Isometric - Domestic Water.

■

For Default View Template, select Plumbing Isometric.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311

■

Under Graphics, for View Classification, select Documentation.

■

For Sub-Discipline, select Plumbing.

■

Click OK.

6 In the Project Browser, right-click Plumbing Isometric - Domestic Water, Water, and click Apply A pply Default View Template. The section crop lines no longer display. 7 Select the WSHPs i n the view, and click Temporary Hide/Isolate

➤

Hide Element.

8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) p iping, press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run, and click to select it.

10 Right-click, and click Override Graphics in View 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■

For Weight, select 3.

■

For Pattern, select Dash.

■

Click Apply, and then click OK.

The selected piping displays as a dashed line.


➤

By Element.

12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming o ff the tankless water heater, press Tab Tab 3 times, and click to select it.

13 Using the same method, change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.


14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe, press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights, as shown), and click to select it.

15 Right-click, and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.


16 Press Esc . 17 Click Annotate tab

➤

Text panel

➤

Text, Text, and in the Type Selector, select 1.5mm Arial.

18 Label the fixtures as shown. Click in the drawing area to start a text label, and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.

19 Using methods learned previously, create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■

Duplicate 3D Plumbing, and in the view properties, rename the new view Plumbing Isometric - Sanitary Waste, and for Default View Template, specify Plumbing - Isometric.

■

Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.

■

On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style

➤

Wireframe.

Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

Project Units.

21 In the Project Units dialog: ■

For Discipline, verify that Common is selected.

■

For Slope, click on the Format value.


In the Format dialog, for Rounding, select To the nearest 10.

■

22 Click OK twice. 23 Click Annotate tab

➤

Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope.

24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe, and click to place the spot slope annotation, as shown.

26 Press Esc twice. Esc twice. 27 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating Callout Views In this exercise, you use a plan view to create a callout view, and then place the callout view on a sheet. When the view is associated with a sheet, the cal lout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information.

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view.


2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel

➤

Callout.

4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel, and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1 : 50. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown, beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.

7 Modify the callout leader: ■

Select the callout bo undary. undary.

■

Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head), and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. boundary.

8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.

Creating Callout Views | 317

Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.

11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■

For the Callout Boundary category, for Line Weight, select 5.

■

Expand the Callout Boundary category and, using the same method, change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.

■

Click OK.

Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click M601 - HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 13 In the Project Browser, select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan, drag it to the sheet, and click in the empty space at the top center to place it.

Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view, and select the viewport.


15 Click Modify Viewports tab Properties.

➤

Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down

➤

Instance


TYP. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP.

■

PLAN. For Title on Sheet, enter WSHP PART PLAN.

■

For Default View Template, select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

■

Click OK.

17 In the Project Browser, right-click the call out view, and click Apply Default View Template. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Ductwork in coarse detail

Ductwork in fine detail

Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.


19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section.

21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel

➤

Callout.

22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel, and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.


24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 25 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail), right-click the detail view, and click Rename. 26 In the Rename View dialog, enter Typical WSHP Detail, Detail, and click OK. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail, and click Apply View Template. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog, under Names, select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation, and click OK. The view is changed to a hidden line li ne display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.


322

14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions

In this lesson, you learn how to: ■

add text notes, duct tags, and diffuser tags to an HVAC HVAC documentation plan.

■

create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specifi c fixtures.

■

work with model-based components, linetypes, symbols, and annotation to create a legend.

Creating Annotations In this exercise, you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC HVAC documentation plan. Training File ■

Click

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m.rvt.

➤

Open ➤ Project.

Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser, under Documentation 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.

➤

HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans, double-click Level

2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C, as shown.

323


➤

Text panel

➤

Text.

4 Click Place Plac e Text tab ➤ Element panel, and select 1.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. drop-down. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤

(Center).

6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air JOISTS. grilles, and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

8 With the text still selected, use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.


324 | Chapter 14 Working with with Annotations Annotations and Dimensions

Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab Straight.

➤

Leader panel

➤

Add Leader: Left Straight, and then click Right

12 Use the leader end grips to drag dra g the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Use Us e the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box, as shown. 13 Press Esc to Esc to clear the selection.

Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel

➤

Tag by Category.

15 On the Options Bar, verify that Leader is cleared. 16 In the drawing area, select a supply diffuser, a return diffuser, a segment of round duct, and a segment of rectangular duct.

The information on each tag varies according to the category of element.

Creating Annotations | 325

17 Click Modify. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method, tag the remaining diffusers in the area. If necessary, move diffuser tags off the ductwork.

Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel drop-down

➤

Loaded Tags.

20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the Load Family dialog, navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct, select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa Tag.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round.rfa, and click Open. 22 In the Tags dialog, under Category, Category, for Ducts, verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag, and click OK. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element, you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 23 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel

➤

Tag by Category.

24 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 25 In the drawing area, select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct, as shown.


26 On the Options Bar, specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP, and then press Esc .

Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser, open Documentation Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.

➤

HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe

29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 30 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel

➤

Tag by Category.

31 On the Options Bar, select Horizontal, Horizo ntal, Leader, and Attached End. 32 In the drawing area, select the select the large pipe on the right as shown.

Creating Annotations | 327

33 On the Options Bar, for Leader, select Free End. 34 In the drawing area, click the top horizontal pi pe in the corridor, as shown.

35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point, then click to the right to place the leader as shown.



Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 37 In the drawing area, select the last tag placed. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 39 In the Type Properties dialog, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow Filled 15 Degree, and click OK. 40 Using the method learned previously, tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style, and the tags placed pl aced previously have changed c hanged to the new style as well. That ’s because you changed a type property, not simply an instance property, property, and all elements of that type are affected.


Creating Dimensions In this exercise, you use temporary dimensions to loc ate, lay out, and lock lighting fixtures. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control, drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.

Creating Dimensions | 329

5 Click

to create a permanent dimension.

6 Press Esc to Esc to clear the selection. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area, select the dimension line. On the Options Bar, notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel

➤

Edit Witness Lines.

9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures, and then select the interior face of the wall. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish.

12 Click EQ. 13 Press Esc . fi xtures in 14 Using the same method, add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures the room.

330 | Chapter Chapter 14 Working with with Annotations Annotations and Dimensions

Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures, click the 3 interior locks

on the line.

17 Press Esc . Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. 19 Select the dimension value (3376.9), enter 2430 2430,, and press Enter . Because the dimensions are locked, the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 20 Using the same methods, lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows, and offset them from the wall. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Legend In this exercise, you create an HVAC HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components, annotation symbols, linework, and notes. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Creating a Legend | 331

Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel

➤

Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.

2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■

Legend. For Name, enter Diffuser Legend.

■

For Scale, select 1 : 50.

■

Click OK.

Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab

➤

Text panel

➤

Text.

4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel, and select 1.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click in the drawing area, and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. LEGEND. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab

➤

Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.


For Family, select Air Terminals Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 - 200 Neck.

■

For View, select Floor Plan.

9 In the drawing area, click below the title to place the diffuser.

10 Using the same method, place: ■

Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection

■

Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection

■

Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser - Sidewall : 450 x 200


11 Press Esc . Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab

➤

Text panel

➤

Text.

13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel, and select 1.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 14 In the drawing area, click next to the top diffuser, and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. DIFFUSER. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment, annotate the remaining components: ■

RETURN DIFFUSER

■

EXHAUST GRILL

■

SIDEWALL SIDEWALL SUPPLY S UPPLY DIFFUSER

16 Click Modify.


Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser, open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 18 Select the ELEVATION ELEVATION INCLINE - DROP and its text note.

19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION ELEVATION INCLINE - RISE symbol for the copy start point, and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE - DROP symbol to specify the copy end point.

21 Press Esc . 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.

24 Select the component’s break line, and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 26 Press Esc .

27 While pressing Ctrl , select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel, select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down, and then press Esc . The selected detail lines are now thin.


➤

Detail panel ➤ Symbol.

334 | Chapter Chapter 14 Working with with Annotations Annotations and Dimensions

30 Select Spot Elevation - Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol, and then click Modify.


➤

Text panel

➤

Text.

33 Click to the left of the left break line, enter E, and then click Modify.

34 Using the method learned previously, mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.

35 Change the text on the right to N, and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser, double-click Sheets (all)

➤

M100 - MECHANICAL LEGEND.

38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet, in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.


39 With the viewport still selected, click Modify Viewports tab w Line - No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 40 Press Esc .



➤

Element panel, and select Title

15

Detailing

In this lesson, you will create: ■

A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.

■

A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.

■

A drafting view using detail components, detail groups, and text.

■

A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.

■

A detail callout cal lout that references another view.

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise, you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Training File ■

Click

■

In the left pane of the Open dialog, dialo g, click Training Files, and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m.rvt.

➤

Open ➤ Project.

Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted, highli ghted, indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser - 113 East elevation view.

337


➤

Tag panel

➤

Tag by Category.

4 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 5 In the drawing area, select each of the 2 panelboards.

Next, you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet, and then modify and align the views. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser, double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 - Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 7 Drag the Power Riser - 113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101, and cli ck to place it. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view vi ew.. 8 Using the same method, place Power Riser - 113 East on the sheet. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.

338 | Chapter 15 Detailing

9 Press Esc . 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area, select the 113 North view, right-click, and cli ck Activate View. 12 Select the Level 1 line, and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left, giving the appearance of a single view vi ew..

13 Right-click, and click Deactivate View. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North N orth view, and click Modify Viewports tab Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

➤ Element

panel ➤ Element

15 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Title on Sheet, enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram, Diagram, and click OK.

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339

Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab Selector drop-down.

➤

Element panel, and select Title w Line - No Title from the Type

Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area, select the 113 East elevation view, right-click, and click Activate View. View. 19 Select the Level 1 line, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 21 Using the drag control, move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view, as shown. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. In the next exercise, you add wiring to the diagram.

22 Press Esc . 23 Close the file with or without saving it.


Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise, you use detail lines li nes to create wiring for the one-line el ectrical riser diagram. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser, verify that Sheets (al l) ➤ E101 - Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted, indicating that it ’s the active view. 2 Close the Project Browser. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 3 Click Manage tab

➤


➤

Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles.

4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■

Under Category, expand Lines.

■

Under Modify Subcategories, clic k New.

■

Power, and click OK. In the New Subcategory dialog, for Name, enter Electrical Power,

■

In the Line Styles dialog, for Line Weight, select 6, and then click OK.

Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area, zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser - 113 North view. 6 Click Annotate tab

➤

Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel, and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 On the Options Bar, verify that Chain is selected. transformer, draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB) , as 9 Beginning at the transformer, shown.

As you draw, notice that there are no snaps active. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag contro ls to make sure the li nes clean up properly.

Creating Detail Wiring | 341

10 Press Esc . 11 Using the same method, add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 13 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3mm. 3mm. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard, as shown.



➤


li ne to MDP_2. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line

17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool, you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line, so that the result is as shown.


20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once, and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 22 Click Annotate tab

➤


23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤

(Start-End-Radius Arc).

24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines li nes at the top of the panel, as shown. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.



➤

Text panel

➤

Text.

26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader, and then click Alignment panel

➤ Horizontal:

(Center). 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel, and select 1.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 Click above the cap, and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. SCHEDULE. 29 Click Modify. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text, and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.

31 While pressing Ctrl , select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.


35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding l ines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

36 Press Esc .


Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. You enter exact values for each line length. 37 Click Annotate tab

➤


38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard, cli ck to specify the start point of the fi rst horizontal line. 39 Move the cursor to the right, enter 12, 12, and press Enter . 40 Press Esc .

41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 42 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3.0. 3.0. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line, and then press Esc .

44 Edit the offset lines: ■

Select the middle line, click cli ck on the length dimension value, enter 7, and press Enter .

■

Using the same method, change the length of the bottom line to 3.

■

Press Esc .

Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire, you can ensure that they stay together. You You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately.


45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down browser view. 46 In the Project Browser, expand Groups

➤

➤

Project Browser to open the

Detail.

47 In the drawing area, while pressing Ctrl , select all 3 lines. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel

➤

Create Group.

49 In the Create Detail Group dialog, for Name, enter Ground, Ground, and click OK. 50 With the group selected, drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line, and then press Esc .

51 Using the method learned previously, draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 52 Select the detail group, and click Modify Detail Groups tab

➤

Modify panel ➤ Move.

53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point, and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.

54 Select the group, and click Modify Detail Groups tab

➤

Create panel

➤

Create Similar Simil ar..

55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B, TP-2B, and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer.


Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don ’t get moved accidentally. acci dentally. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right), select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

59 Close the file with or without saving it. In later exercises, you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here, and will place it on sheet E01.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise, you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. You You use a view vi ew template to isol ate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Documentation and double click Typical Make Up Air.

➤

HVAC - Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section),

2 Zoom in to view the section. 3 Select the section box, and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor.

4 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

➤

3D

5 Right-click the copy, and click Rename. 6 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail, and click OK. 7 Right-click the ViewCube, and click Orient to View

➤

Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air.

8 On the ViewCube, click Home, and then click the corner where the Top, Back, and Left sides converge, and then press Esc .

Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser, right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail, and click Apply View Template. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■


For Show Type, select 3D Views, Walkthroughs. Walkthroughs.

■

Under Names, select 3D HVAC HVAC Iso.

■

Click OK.

This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab

➤

Text panel

➤

Text.

12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel, and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel

➤

Two Segments.

14 Place the label: ■

Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader.

■

Move the cursor down and to the left, and cli ck to specify the second leader poi nt.

■

Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point.

■

AHU-1. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1.

■

Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

15 Using the same method, label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper); Typical. Typical . 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct, and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown.

Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected, click Place Text tab

➤

Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal:

(Right).

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351

18 Press Esc .

19 Complete the text labels, as shown. To rotate and reposition a text label, select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display.

Modify the view i nstance properties for the view. 20 In the drawing area, type VP to open the instance 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Extents, select Crop Region Visible, and then click OK. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 23 Click on the crop region, and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail, as shown.

24 Access the instance properties for the view, and under Extents, select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible.


25 Click OK. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser, open Sheets (all)

➤

M601-HVAC M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS.

28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. ew, and click Activate View. 29 Right click the vi ew, 30 On the View Control Bar, specify 1 : 2 for the scale, and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view, and click View Properties. 32 In the Instance Properties, scroll down, and under Extents, select Crop View and Section Box, clear Crop Region Visible, and click OK. 33 Right-click the view, and click Deactivate View. View.


Drafting Detail Components In this exercise, you: ■

Create a drafting view.

■

Place a detail component.

■

Work with a filled region that represents a detail component.

■

Use detail lines to create a detail group.

■

Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes.

Training File ■

Click

■


➤

Open ➤ Project.

Drafting Detail Components | 353

Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel

➤

Drafting View.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■

Detail . For Name, enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.

■

For Scale, select 1 : 5.

■

Click OK.

The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification, you can more accurately locate the view in i n the Project Browser hierarchy. 3 In the Project Browser, right-click the view name, and click Properties. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select Plumbing.

■

For View Classification, select Documentation.

■

Click OK.

Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab

➤

Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 9 Zoom in to the component.

Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab

➤

Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region.

11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab

➤

Draw panel ➤

(Rectangle).

12 On the Element panel, select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 13 In the drawing area, click the point at the top of the drain, as shown, as the rectangle start point.


14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140.

15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab

➤

Element panel ➤ Region Properties.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog, di alog, for Type, select C.I.P. Concrete, and click OK. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab

➤

Region panel ➤ Finish Region.

18 With the filled region still selected, click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back, and then press Esc .

Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab

➤

Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.

20 Select 1.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 In the drawing area, click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 22 Click Modify.


Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 23 In the drawing area, select the filled region. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. Boundary. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab

➤

Draw panel ➤

(Line).

26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide, click to select the indicated poi nts in succession from left to right to define the new boundary.

28 Click Modify.

29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew, press Tab to highlight the chain of lines, and then click to select them. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point, and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 34 Press Esc .


35 Draw a line from the end of the last l ast copied boundary line down to the base of the slab.

36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab

➤

Edit panel ➤ Trim.

37 Select the small vertical line you just drew, and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line.

38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2, and then select the side of the slab above the line.

40 Click Finish Region, and then press Esc . 41 Type ZF to zoom out. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.


Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab

➤


43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤

(Rectangle).

45 Using the method learned previously, draw a rectangle on top of the filled region, as shown. This represents the vinyl composition flooring.

Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab

➤


47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide, draw wide detail lines as shown.

49 Click Modify. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines, press Tab to highlight the chain, and then click to select them. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel

➤

Create Group.

52 In the Create Group dialog, for Name, enter Flashing Membrane_F.D. Membrane_F.D.,, and click OK. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area, select the Flashing Membrane group. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.


54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines, as shown.

55 Press Esc . Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 57 Click Annotate tab

➤

Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location, as shown.

61 Using the same method, press Spacebar twice, Spacebar twice, and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab ’s left edge.


62 Press Esc twice. Esc twice. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline, and use the grips to resize the masking region, as shown.

64 Press Esc twice. Esc twice. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 65 Click Annotate tab

➤

Tag panel

➤

Keynote drop-down ➤ User.

66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 67 On the Options Bar, select Leader and Free End. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.


70 In the Keynotes dialog, select 15000 (Division 15 - Mechanical) Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing, and then click OK.

➤

15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150.A2

71 Click Modify. 72 If necessary, select the keynote and drag the text to the right.

Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 73 Click Annotate tab

➤

Text panel

➤

74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel

Text. ➤

Two Segments.

75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤

(Right).

76 To select the leader start point, click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image.

77 Move the cursor up and to the left, and cli ck to specify the second leader poi nt. 78 Move the cursor to the left, and click to specify the text insertion point. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange, Flange, and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 80 Press Esc twice. Esc twice. 81 Select the text note, and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.


82 Continue annotating the detail, as shown.

Add dimensions You add a di mension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab

➤

Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.

84 Using the following image as a guide, click to select the slab lines li nes in the order indicated.


85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line, and then press Esc twice. Esc twice.

Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser, open P103 - Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet, and click to place it.

88 In the drawing area, select the view title. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 90 Press Esc . 91 Close the file with or without saving it.


364

Revit MEP 2011 Tutorial

Recommend Documents